E6ca nam ngan gon

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.14 MB, 184 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Date of preparing: 14 / 8 / 09

REVISION

Period: 1

A. Objectives

- Getting to know about English (country, people, language)
- To interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Poster, picture

C. Methods: Eliciting, questions & answers, singing a song
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students

6A
6B

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)

-Gv kiểm tra đồ dùng học tập của Hs (bút viết, bút chì, giấy nháp, thước kẻ…), kiểm
tra sách vở và YC thêm nếu thiếu (SGK, SGK Vở BT, workbook, vở…).

III. New lesson
Step 1: Pre – task (7p)

- Chatting in Vietnamese:

“Em đã được làm quen với TA lần nào chưa?”

“Em đã bao giờ được nghe người nước ngồi nói chuyện với nhau bằng Tiếng Anh
thực tế ngồi đời chưa?”

“Em có thích học Tiếng Anh khơng? Theo em học Tiếng Anh có khó không? ”
- Hs trả lời theo thực tế.

Step 2: While – task (15p)

1. Gv giới thiệu qua về nước Anh.

Liên hiệp Vương quốc Anh và Bắc Ireland (tiếng Anh: United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, tên gọi ngắn là United Kingdom, viết tắt là UK) là một
quốc gia nằm ở phía tây bắc châu Âu. Liên hiệp Vương quốc Anh và Bắc Ireland bao
gồm 4 phần chính là Anh (England), Scotland, Wales và Bắc Ireland. Ngoài ra
Vương quốc Liên hiệp Anh và Bắc Ireland còn bao gồm một số hòn đảo và quần đảo
khác tại nhiều nơi trên thế giới. Vương quốc này có chung đường biên giới với

Ireland

Tiếng Anh (English) là một thứ tiếng thuộc nhánh miền Tây của nhóm ngơn ngữ

German trong hệ Ấn-Âu), đã du nhập vào Anh qua các thứ tiếng của nhiều dân xâm

chiếm vào thế kỷ thứ 6. Tiếng Anh truyền khắp nơi dưới chủ nghĩa thực dân trong
thời kỳ thịnh vượng của Đế quốc Anh, từ đảo Anh qua nước Úc, Canada, Hồng

Kông, New Zealand, Hoa Kỳ và một số nơi khác.Tiếng Anh là ngôn ngữ phổ thông

thứ ba trên thế giới và là ngôn ngữ bản địa của khoảng 402 triệu người vào năm

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

người học sử dụng. Tiếng Anh được sử dụng phổ biến nhờ vào ảnh hưởng của Mỹ và

Anh trên các lĩnh vực quân sự, kinh tế, khoa học, tin học, chính trị và văn hóa.
2. English Alphabet

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

-Bảng chữ cái Tiếng Anh có 26 chữ cái : - 5 nguyên âm (A E I O U) + 21 phụ âm.
- Ss practice the alphabet.

- Ss spell the letters: BROWNS; NHUNG; HANH… and spell their names.

Step 3: Post – task (10p)

- T shows Ss the Alphabet song then helps Ss to sing the song.

A B C D E F G. H I J K L M N O P. Q R S and T U V. W and X Y Z.
A B C D E F G. Sing the song of ABC.

IV. Summary

- England, English, English Alphabet.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review the Alphabet, Alphabet song. Prepare for next period. (sách vở môn TA )

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

UNIT 1:

GREETINGS

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to: - Getting people, introduce oneself and others.
- Say how old one is and others are.

- Count to twenty.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues

III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 – 4 a) “Hello/Hi, I’m…../ My name’s…….” to
introduce yourself.

b) Numbers 0 – 5

P. 10-11
Lesson 2 A 5 – 8 a) “How are you?” - “I’m fine, thanks.” to greet

each other.

b) Numbers 6 – 10

P. 12-13
Lesson 3 B 1 – 6 a) “Good morning/afternoon/…..” to greet each

other. Use “We’re …….” to talk about “us”.
b) Numbers 10 – 16.

P. 14-16
Lesson 4 C 1 – 4 a) Numbers 16 – 20.

b) “How old are you?” to talk about age and
contrast with “How old are you?”.

P. 17-19

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

-Lesson 5 C 5 - 6 Further Practice in Numbers 1 – 20 to cout and
give telephone numbers

P. 19
Date of preparing: 17 / 8 / 09

UNIT 1: GREETINGS

Lesson 1:

A1 – A4

P.10 - 11

Period: 2

A. Objectives

- Numbers 0 – 5; using “Hello / Hi, I’m……../ My name is……” to
introduce your self.

- Improve Ss’s skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD player, cards

C. Methods: Rub out & remember, slap the board, guessing game, dictation,
wordcues drill, dilogue buid.

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students

6A
6B

II. Revision / Warmer(5p)
- ABC song (the whole class)

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

IV. Summary

Numbers 0 – 5 ; “Hi / Hello , I’m / My name’s…………”

V. Homework(8p)
Review Voc, Grammar, practice the dialogues in A1 – A4
Do the exercises A 1,2 P. 4 – 5 Workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-Step 1
Prsentation

(10p)
Step 2
Practice

(20p)

Presenting Voc

Activity 1:

Dialogue buid

Hi, I’m….. Hi, I’m….
Activity 2:

- Ss work in groups of 4 – 5,
practice A4 P. 11

Activity 3:

Presenting numbers 0 - 5
Activity 4:

Rubout & remember

Activity 5: Dictation

T reads, Ss write the numbers
in their notepapers

I. Vocabulary
Hi

Hello

Xin chào
name (n): tên

my (đtsh): của tôi / tớ …..
II. Grammar

Cách chào hỏi, giới thiệu tên:
Ex:

a) Lan: Hi, I’m [Lan]
Ba : Hi, I’m [Ba]

b) Ba: Hello. My name’s [Ba]

Nam: Hello. My name’s [Nam]

III. Numbers

0 = oh 2 = two 4 = four
1 = one 3 = three 5 = five
Ex: 031 251 023 410
2340 32104 44102 31022

Step 3
Further
practice

(7p)

Activity 6: Wordcue drll

Ex: S1: Quang Ninh Please ?

S2: 033

Guessing game

Ex: A: oh three three?
B: no.

C: oh five four?
B: yes.

C: Hue.

Quang Ninh
033

Da Nang

0511 Hai Phong031

Hue
054

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

Date of preparing: 18 / 8 / 09

UNIT 1: GREETINGS

Lesson 2:

A 5 - 8

Period: 3

A. Objectives

- “How are you?” – “I’m fine, thanks” to greet each other; Numbers 6 – 10.
- Helping Ss to know the ways to greet each other.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, cards

C. Methods: Matching, Dictation, Jumbled words, Rub out & remember dialogue
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students

6A
6B

II. Revision / Warmer(10p)

Dictation:T reads: 234 152 014 235 2034 34051 35024 05132

Jumbled words:

wto = two ether = three eno = one rofu = four iefv = five ho = oh

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(12p)

Step 2
Practice

(13p)

Step 3

Eliciting Voc

Explainations
Situation
Situation
Explainations
Explainations
Explainations

Rub out & remember

dialogue A 5 P. 12

Activity 1: T Presents Gr
from the dialogue.

Activity 2: Roleplay A6 P.12.
Wrting A7 P.13

Activity 3:

Present No 6 – 10

Matching:

Wordsquare

Five, two, eight, four,
seven, three, oh,

I. Vocabulary

tobe: is, am, are. (thì, là, bị, ở…)
fine (a): khoẻ, tốt, đẹp

thanks (n-sn): Cảm ơn nhiều
Miss: Cơ (chưa có chồng)
Mr: ông, chú, bác…

Mrs: cô, bác…(đã có chồng)
II. Grammar

Cách chào hỏi (hỏi thăm về SK)
How are you?

- I’m fine, thanhk you

- I’m fine, thanhks And you?
III. Numbers

6 = six 7 = seven 8 = eight
9 = nine 10 = ten

Six 8

Eight 10

Ten 7

Nine 6

Seven 9

O F I V E G T

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

Further
Practice

(5p)

Nine, ten, six, one E I G H T T I

I X S E V E N

F O U R G N E

T H R E E O H

IV. Summary

- - “How are you?” – “I’m fine, thanks” to greet each other; Numbers 6 – 10.

V. Homework(5p)

- Review Voc + Gr, do the exercises A3 – 4 P.5 workbook. (điền từ vào chỗ trống để
hoàn thành các hội thoại)

- BT 3 viết đoạn hội thoại tương tự.

Evaluation

……….

……….
……….
Date of preparing: 21 / 8 / 09

UNIT 1: GREETINGS

Lesson 3:

B 1 – 6 P.14-16

Period: 4

A. Objectives

- Use “Good morning/afternoon/…” to greet each other. Use “We’re …”
to talk about “us”.Numbers 10 – 16.

- Improve Ss’s skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: Picture cues, CD players

C. Methods: Picture drill, written exercise, Ordering, Gapfill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)

Gap filll: Fill in the missing words.

Ss work individually. T helps
Ss to correct.

Hoa: My … is Hoa

Nga: … am Nga. How are …?
Hoa: I’m …, thanks. And you?
Nga: Fine. Thanks.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Picture
Picture
Explaination
Situation
Explaination

I. Vocabulary

Good morning: Chào buổi sáng
afternoon: Chào buổi chiều
evening: Chào buổi tối
night: Chúc ngủ ngon

We (đtnx): Chúng tôi, chúng em…
children (n, sn): trẻ em

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

-Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(7p)

Activity1: Picture cue 
drill

Activity 2:

Written exercise B4 P.16
Ss work individually.

Activity 3:
Presenting the
numbers 11-15

Picture drill

Ex:

A: ten and two
B: twelve

Ordering (No 0 - 15)

T reads: six, twelve, eight,
eleven, ten, four, seven,
fourteen,three, fifteen, one,
nine, thirteen, two, oh,five

Ex: A: Goodmorning!
B: Goodmorning!

II. writing
Lan: Good afternoon Nga
Nga: Good afternoon Lan.
Lan: How are you?

Nga: I am fine thanks. And you?

Lan: Fine thanks.
Nga: Goodbye.
Lan: Bye

III. Numbers

11 = eleven 14 = fourteen
12 = twelve 15 = fifteen
13 = thirteen

The keys: oh(15), one(11), two(14),
three(9), four(6), five(16), six(1),
seven(7), eight(3), nine(12), ten(5),
eleven(4), twelve(2), thirteen(13),
fourteen(8), fifteen(10)

IV. Summary

- Use “Good morning/afternoon/…” to greet each other. Use “We’re …” to talk
about “us”.Numbers 10 – 16.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc + Gr, practice B2 / 15 B6 P.16.

Do the exercises B 1 – 3 P. 6 – 7 workbook.

1) Nối các bức tranh với các từ tương ứng trên bảng đã cho.
2) Viết các đoạn hội thoại theo trật tự đúng.

3) Hoàn thành các đoạn hội thoại.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

7:00 14:00

18:00 22:00

3 + 7 6 + 8 7 + 5

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

Date of preparing: 24 / 8 / 09

UNIT 1: GREETINGS

Lesson 4:

C 1 – 4 P. 17 - 19

Period: 5

A. Objectives

- Numbers 16 – 20. “How old are you?” to talk about age and
contrast with “How old are you?”.

- Improve Ss’s skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, pictures, cards

C. Methods: Jumbled words, Noughts & Crosses, Bingo game, picture
drill.

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer
Jumbled words: (10p)

wlevte = twelve tefeifn = fifteen thnirtee = thirteen neefourt = fourteen
Ss work with the partners.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(5p)
Step 2
Practice

(15p)

(5p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Present the numbers 15 - 20
Activity 1:

- Noughts & Crosses

A: fifteen

B: (đánh dấu trên bảng theo
kí hiệu của đội vào đúng ơ)
Activity 2:

Bingo game C5/ 19

Ss write 5 numbers from 10 –
20.

Activity 3: Eleciting Voc
Explaination

Explaination

Explaination (365 days)
Set the sence: picture C 3/18

Activity 4: Picture drill

I. Numbers

16 = sixteen 19 = nineteen
17 = seventeen 20 = twenty
18 = eighteen

15 19 16

20 14 17

12 18 13

T reads:

20 14 13 18 11 19 16 17 12 15
II. Vocabulary

This (đt): này, cái này, đây…
old (a): già, cũ

year (n): năm

II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về tuổi:

How old are you?
- I am eleven (years old.)



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-13
18

15
14

16 17

20
12

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

Ex:

A: How old are you?

B: I am eleven (years old).

IV. Summary

- Numbers 16 – 20. “How old are you?” to talk about age

V. Homework

- Review Voc + Gr, Numbers 0 – 20.

- Do the exercise C 3 + 4 P.8 - 10 workbook.
“And you?”=> Còn bạn thế nào (How old are you?)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 25 / 8 / 09

UNIT 1: GREETINGS

Lesson 5:

C5 – C6 P. 19

Period:6

A. Objectives

- Further practice in Numbers 1 – 20 to count and give telephone numbers.
- Improve Ss’s skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: Cards, wordcues, piccture cues

C. Methods: Jumbled words, wordcue drill, bingo game, survey
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students

6A
6B

II. Revision / Warmer(10p)
* Bingo game: C5/19

- Ss choose write 5 numbers from 0 to 20.

Teacher reads: 10, 7, 19, 15, 20, 6, 8, 1, 4, 11, 14, 2, 0, 3, 16, 5, 17, 12, 18, 13, 9.
* Jumbled words

ytwnet = twenty teeneevsn = seventeen eintenen = nineteen

eenthirdt = thirdteen sixnente = sixteen fetenif = fifteen

Ss do this individually.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Activity 1: Presenting Voc
explaination

examples

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Sep 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

picture

Muốn biết SĐT của người đang
nói chuyện với mình em phải
hỏi ntn?

Activity 1: Wordcue drill

3879963 925764 642817
3584702 3763124

048262713 0987368945
Activity 2:Dictation

Ss practice in closed pairs
asking, answering, writing the
phone numbers.

Production

Survey

S1: What’s name?

S2: [Hoa]

S1: What’s your number?

S2: It’s [033763194]

phone (n): điện thoại

II. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về số điện thoại:
What’s your number ?

What’s your phone number?
- It’s…………..

Ex:

S1: What’s your phone number?

S2: It’s 3879963

Name Telephone Number

Hoa 033763194

IV. Summary

Numbers 0 – 20; Further practice in saying phone number.

V. Homework(5p)

- Review the Voc, Grammar, Do the exercises A – B workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….

……….

UNIT 2:

AT SCHOOL

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Give and obey orders

- Ask for and give personal informatiion
- Identify oneself and others.

- Identify places, people and objects.

II. Teaching aids: CD player, cards, posters, wordcues
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 – 4 Classroom Imperatives to understand the
teacher’s commands

P. 20 - 22
Lesson 2 B 1 - 2 “Where do you live?” questions and answers

to talk about places you live.

P. 12-13
Lesson 3 B 3 – 4 “What’s your name?” and “How do you spell P. 24 - 25

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

-it?” with the alphabet (a – x) to talk about your

name.

Lesson 4 B 5 – 6 Further practice in personal information,
alphabet and numbers.

P. 25
Lesson 5 C1 This / That, positive stattements and Y/N

Questions to talk about people and things at
school.

P. 26 - 27
Lesson 6 C 2 - 4 “What’s this/that ?” “It’s a / an …….to talk

about things in the classroom.”

P. 28 - 29
Date of preparing: 04 / 9 / 09

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL

Lesson 1:

A1 – 4 P. 20 - 22

Period:7

A. Objectives

- Classroom Imperatives to understand the teacher’s commands
- Improve Ss’s skill in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: Poster, CD players

C. Methods:

Noughts & crosses, matching, mime drill, Simon says, mapped dialogue.
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

Noughts & crosses (8p)
Ss work in 2 teams
Take turn to give result.

Ex: Team 1: A: nine and five

B: fourteen

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(10p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Actions
Situation
Mime
Mime
Real object

Simon says

Activity 1: Mime drill

T mimes

(open your book)

I. Vocabulary
(to) come in: đi vào

(to) sit down: ngồi xuống
(to) stand up: đứng lên
open (v): mở, mở ra
close (v): gập, đóng

book (n): quyển sách

II. Practice
a. V+...

b. Don’t + V...
Ss say:

9 + 5 2 + 7 10 + 2

17 + 1 6 + 5 8 + 4

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

Step 3
Further
Practice
(12p)

(stand up) (come in)
Activity 2: Matching

Ss match and write A2 P. 21

Mapped dialogue

Ss T

…morning
…Miss Hoa How are…
We’re…..

…And you? Fine…sit...
Yes Miss. Open…

Yes Miss

Open your book!
Stand up! Come in! ...
* Write A2 P. 21

a. open your book b. sit down
c. come in d. close your book
e. stand up

Example exchange:
T: Goodmorning!

Ss: Goodmorning Miss Hoa
T: How are you?

Ss: We’re fine. Thank you And you?
T: Fine, thanks, Sit down.

Ss: Yes Miss!

T: Open your book, please.
Ss: Yes Miss!

IV. Summary

- Classroom Imperatives to understand the teacher’s commands.

V. Homework (5p)

Review Voc, commands. Do the exercise A 1, 2 P.11-12 work book.
A1: Match the words to make commands.

Prepare for next period B 1 – 2

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 05 / 9 / 09

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL

Lesson 2:

B 1 – 2 P. 23 - 24

Period: 8

A. Objectives

- “Where do you live?” questions and answers to talk about places you live.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, word cue drill, poster

C. Methods: Simon says, Word cue drill, Noughts & Crosses, Survey
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

Jumbled words:

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

-1. tis / nowd = sit down enop = open

2. tands / pu = stand up olecs = close

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Production

(7p)

Eleciting Voc
Translation
Picture
Examples
Examples
Explaination
Slap the board

Set the sence: “Muốn
biết nơi ở của bạn mình
em sẽ hỏi bạn ấy như
thế nào?”

Activity 1: Picture drill

Activity 2: Gap fill
Ss work with the
partners.

Noughts & Crosses
Ss in one team ask +
answer

I. Vocabulary
live (v): sống, sinh sống
house (n): ngôi nhà

street (n): đường phồ, phố

city (n): thành phố

where (nvt): đâu, ở đâu
II. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về nơi ở:

Where do you live? (Bạn sống ở đâu?)

- I live in a house.
in a city.
in the country.

on Tran Phu street.
Ex: A: Where do you live?
B: I live [in the country]

* Exercise C4 / 13 workbook.

a house Le Loi street the country
a street Tran Phu

street

Ha Long city
HCM city Quang Ninh Ha Noi

IV. Summary

- “Where do you live?” questions and answers to talk about places you live.

V. Homework

- Review Gr + Voc, practice B 1 – 2 P. 23 – 25 fluently.

- Do the exercise B4, 6 / 13 workbook. Prepare for next period “B3-6”.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 07 / 9 / 09

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL

Lesson 3:

B 3 – 4 P. 24 - 25

Period: 9

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- “What’s your name?” and “How do you spell it?” with the
alphabet (a – x) to talk about your name.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, wordcues, Alphabet.

C. Methods: Wordcue drill, transformation writing, shark attack, bingo game,
Rub out & remember dialogue, word cue drill

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer(10p)

Transformation writing: Viết câu đầy đủ nghĩa dựa vào các từ cho sẵn.
a. Where / you / live ? => Where do you live?

b. I / Ho Chi Minh / city. => I live in Ho Chi Minh City.

Correct words: 4pts. Correct Gr: 4pts Speak well these one: 2pts

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre - task

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15)

Step 3
Further

Practice

(5p)

Shark attack:

* Bingo: C.3 - P.24

Ss choose any 9 letters from
the alphabet.

Activity 1: Rub out &
remember dialogue
Activity 2: word cue drill

Ss practice as B4
Role play

Ss ask their real names.

I. Vocabulary
- - - (house)
- - - (street)
- - - (goodbye)
- - - - (open)
- - - (close)

T reminds Ss of the Alphabet.

T reads: A E I O X Z B G W L Q S T

Y M C R F D J N K H P V U.

II. Grammar
Cách hỏi / đáp về tên

Ms Loan: What’s your name?
Lan: My name is Lan.
Ms Loan: How do you spell it?
Lan: L – A – N, Lan.

How do you spell it?
=> How do you spell your name

IV. Summary

- “What’s your name?” and “How do you spell it?” with the alphabet (a – x) to talk
about your name.

V. Homework (5p)



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-Dieu
Nam

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

- Review the alphabet, modal dialogue, practice Alphabet song.
- Do the exsercise B1-6 P. 12 – 13 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 11 / 9 / 09

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL

Lesson 4:

B 5 – 6 P.25

Period:10

A. Objectives

- Further practice in personal information, alphabet and numbers.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: Poster, cards
C. Methods

Jumbled words, Dictation list, Noughts & Crosses, Lucky papers, Hangman
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 14 / 9 / 10 Bảo, Thùy

6B 14 / 9 / 10 Cảnh, Thắng

II. Revision / Warmer

- Jumplewords.(8p)

WEEINGN= evening TREEST = street YICT = City
TEETHINR = thirteen TWELEV = twelve MNEA = name

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(7p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Activity 1:
Dictation list.

T reads: a b c d f g h I j
k l m n o p q r s t u v w
x y z

Ss write in the table.
Activity 2: Hangman

Activity 3:
Lucky papers

I. Alphabet

/ei/ /i/ /e/ /ou/ /ai/ /ju/ /a/

A B C F L O I Q R

H D E M N Y W

J G P S X U

K T V Z

MORNING (7) TWENTY (6)
NIGHT (5) SIT/DOWN (3/4)

II. Answer the questions
1. How are you?

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

Step 3
Further
Practice
(10p)

Ss work in 2 teams

Noughts & Crosses
Ex: Team A:

A: Where do you live?

B: I live in a house.

3. What’s your name?

4. How do you spell your name?
5. How are you?

6. Good morning!

A house 12 Le Loi street

20 H-U-N-G Fine, thanks

Goodbye A city H-O-A-I

IV. Summary

- Further practice in personal information, alphabet and numbers.

V. Homework

- Review the alphabet. The ways to ask about name, age, living place.
- Finish the exercises A + B in workbook, Unit 2.

- Prepare for next period C1 P.26.

Evaluation

……….
………

……….
.……….
Date of preparing: 13 / 9 / 10

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL

Lesson 5:

C1 P. 26

Period:11

A. Objectives

- This / That, positive stattements and Y/N Questions to talk about
people and things at school.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, pictures, wordcues
C. Methods: Matching, Word cue drill, Picture drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 16 / 9 / 10 Yến, Lan

6B 16 / 9 / 10 Hà, Thu

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
English Alphabet song: (the whole class)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

Eleciting Voc
Examples
Real life

I. Vocabulary
student (n) = pupil: Học sinh
teacher (n): Giáo viên

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

-(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Real life
Explaination
Real objects
Explaination

Explaination

Activity 1: Matching

student Trường học

desk lớp học

class Học sinh

school Giáo viên
teacher bàn học
Activity 2:

Word cue drill:

A: What’s this in English?
B: It’s a desk.

Activity 3: Eleciting Gr
Picture drill

T uses picture from P. 26-27
Ex:

A: Is this your desk?
B: Yes. It is / No it isn’t
T points to real things in and
around the classroom. Ask +
answer about real life.

school (n): Trường học
class (n): lớp học
desk (n): bàn học
That is ... Đây là…
This is ... Kia/ Đó là….

II. Grammar

Cách giới thiệu về đồ vật (của mình):
This

That is + my + N (tên đồ vật)
Câu hỏi:

Is this / that your + N (tên đồ vật)
- Yes. It is / - No. It isn’t (is not)

IV. Summary

- This / That, positive stattements and Y/N Questions to talk about people and things
at school.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc + Gr.

- Do the exercise C 2 / 15 workbook.

My: của tôi. Your : của bạn

Ex: This is my classroom => Is this your classroom?

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 17 / 9 / 10

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL

Lesson 6:

C 1 – 4 P. 28-29

thầy, cô giáo
trường học
lớp

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

Period: 12

A. Objectives

- “What’s this / that ?” “It’s a / an …….to talk about things in the classroom.”
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: Pictures, poster, papers

C. Methods: Picture cue drill, Wordsquare, Lucky Numbers
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 20 / 9 / 10 Trường, Vân

6B 20 / 9 / 10 Tân, Thảo

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)
- Do the exercise 2 P.15

1) b. Is this your bag? (5pts) c. Is that your school? (5pts)
2) d. Is that your teacher? (5pts) e. Is this your desk? (5pts)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(7p)

Eleciting Gr
Picture C2/ 28

Ba Lan

Activity 1:

Picture cue drill

A: What is this?
B: It’s [a door].

A: How do you spell it?
B: D O O R

Activity 2: Wordsquare

Window, board
Pen (s), ruler

Pencil, (pen), desk, door,
school, clock, eraser

Lucky Numbers

Ss work in 2 teams.

I. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về tên đồ vật này (kia).
What is this? This is…..

What is that? That is ... It is…
* a / an: một

VD: a door: một cái cửa

II. Practice
* C 2 / 25

W P E N S C E X

O E D D C L R D

D N E O H O A R

N C S O O C S A

I I K R O K E O

W L R U L E R B

* Answer the questions

1. How do you spell “DESK”?

2. How do you spell “CLASSROOM”?
3. LUCKY NUMBER!

4. How do you spell “CLOCK”?
5. How do you spell “PENCIL”?
6. How do you spell “RULER”?
7. LUCKY NUMBER!

8. How do you spell “ERASER”?



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

9. LUCKY NUMBER!

10. How do you spell “WINDOW”?

IV. Summary

- - “What’s this / that ?” “It’s a / an …….to talk about things in the classroom.”

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Gr + Voc (objects)

- Do the exercise C1 P.14 (Hs ghi tên các đồ vật dưới mỗi bức tranh của đồ vật đó).
- Do C3 P.15 – 16 work book (Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại dựa vào mẫu câu “What is
this / that?”)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….

UNIT 3:

AT HOME

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Identify places and objects.
- Give personal informatiion

- Identify people, describe the numbers.
- Ask for and give the numbers.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures.
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 – 2 “Wh” questions with This / That, These /
Those and living room Voc to talk about
things in the house.

P. 30 - 31
Lesson 2 A 3 - 4 Family Voc, possessive pronouns my, your,

her, his, and “Who’s this / that?” questions to
talk about family members.

P. 32 - 34
Lesson 3 B 1 – 2 Numbers 21 - 100 and pronunciation of plural

nouns (/s/ /z/ /iz/) to count things in the
classroom.

P. 35 - 36
Lesson 4 B 3 – 5 “How many … are there?” questions and

further practice in numbers to talk about things
in the classroom.

P. 37
Lesson 5 C 1 - 2 Reading a text about a family to understand the

details and talk about jobs.

P. 38 - 39
Lesson 6 Grammar

Practice

Further Practice in “be” Imperatives, Numbers,
Questions words, There is / are, Furniture Voc.

P. 40 - 43
Date of preparing: 18 / 9 / 10

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 2 P. 30 - 31

Period: 13

A. Objectives

- Using “Wh” questions with This / That, These / Those and living room
Voc to talk about things in the house.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, pictures

C. Methods: Matching, slap the board, picture cue drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 21 / 9 / 10 Quang, Khôn

6B 21 / 9 / 10 Hậu, Hằng

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)

Telling things: T gives the names of things in Vietnamese then tha class give in EL.
Ex: Quyển sách, cô giáo, học sinh, cái bàn, bàn học, bút chì, thước kẻ...

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Eleciting Voc

T presents A1 P. 31

Ss listen and repeat (using CD
players). T may help if

necessary.
- Slap the board

I. Vocabulary

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

T calls the words in Vietnamese
Activity 2: Matching

Match the words with the correct pictures.



a lamp

a television
a clock
a bookshelf
a chair
a couch
a stereo

a telephone



Activity 3:
Picture cue drill
A2 P. 31

II. Grammar

a table : một cái bàn tables : những cái bàn
=> Dạng số nhiều của danh từ ta thêm “s”
hoặc “es” vào sau danh từ.

couch – couches

* This -> These That -> Those
Cách hỏi đáp về tên đồ vật (số nhiều):

What are these? These are [tên đvật]



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-a l-amp
a chair

a couch

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

Step 3

Further
Practice

(5p)

Ss practice in close
pairs.

What are those? Those
A: What are these?

B: These are [lamps]

A: What are those?
B: Those are [lamps]

IV. Summary

- Using “Wh” questions with This / That, These / Those and living room Voc to talk
about things in the house.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc + Grammar

- Do the exercises A 1: Viết đtcđ và tên đồ vật dưới mỗi bức tranh tương ứng.
A 2: Hoàn thành câu theo mẫu.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 20 / 9 / 10

UNIT 3: AT HOME

Lesson 2:

A 3 – 4 P. 32 - 34

Period: 14

A. Objectives

- Family Voc, possessive pronouns my, your, her, his, and “Who’s this / that?”
questions to talk about family members.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, poster, pictures
C. Methods:

Noughts & crosses, Grid, Dialogue build, Word cue drill, Describe and draw
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 23 / 9 / 10 Minh, Quân

6B 23 / 9 / 10 Oanh, Sỹ

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)
Noughts & crosses

Ex:

A: What are these?
B: These are [couches]
Ss work in 2 teams. Each
team has to come to the

board and points then answer.

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(10p)
Step 3
Further
Practice

(7p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Picture
Picture
Picture
Explaination

Wordstorming

mother
sister father
Activity 1: T presents the
possessive pronouns and
modal.

Activity 2: Word cue drill

Talk about Ba’s family
Mother

Nga

Father
Hà

Sister
Lan

Describe and draw

Ss draw their families. In
paits, they practice as above
A: Who is this?

B: This is my [mother]

I. Vocabulary
mother (n): mẹ

father (n): cha, bố

brother (n):anh (em) trai
sister (n): chị (em) gái

He (đtnx n3):anh ấy, bạn ấy (nam)
She (đtnx n3): chị ấy, cô ấy (nữ)

II. Grammar
* Possessive pronouns

I – My You – your He – His
We - Our You - Your She – Her
* Cách hỏi đáp về người này, người kia

Who is this? This is ….
that? That

III. Practice
A: Who is that?

B: That is her mother.
A: What is her name?
B: Her name is Nga.

IV. Summary

- Family Voc, possessive pronouns my, your, her, his, and “Who’s this / that?”
questions to talk about family members.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc + Gr, Practice A 3 4 fluently.

- Do the exercise A 4, 5 P. 33 student’s book (Viết lại các câu trả lời).

- Prepare for next lesson (Dạng số nhiều của danh từ, Voc P.36, Numbers 0 - 20)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 24 / 9 / 10

UNIT 3: AT HOME

Lesson 3:

B 1 -2 P. 35 - 36

Period: 15

A. Objectives



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- Numbers 12 – 100 and pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/ /z/ /iz/) to count
the things in the classroom.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, pictures, poster

C. Methods: Snakes and ladders, Realife drill, Dictation list, what and
where

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 27 / 9 / 10 Trung, Đô

6B 27 / 9 / 10 Khải, Phước

II. Revision / Warmer(8p)
Shack attack:

MOTHER (6) SISTER (6) BROTHER(7) FAMILY(6)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(12p)

- T presents A1 P.36
101: one hundred and one
502: five hundred and two
- slap the board.

Ss count the numbers from 20 –
55.

T shows Ss how to play Snakes
& Ladders.

Eleciting Voc
Real object
Real object
Picture
Picture

Rub out & remember

Activity 1:

- T elicits the ways to form
plural coutable nouns.

Activity 2: T presents the modal
sentences.

T: Để nói (giới thiệu) về số
lượng ta thường dùng cách nói
ntn trong TV?

Ex: Có một cái bàn.

There is a table.

Có 2 quyển sách.

There are two books.

Activity 3:

Realia drill
Dictation list

I. Numbers

30 : thirty 40 : forty 50 : fifty
60 : sixty 70 : seventy 80 : eighty
90 : ninety 100 : one hundred.

II. Vocabulary
bench (n): ghế dài

box (n): cái hộp
bookcase (n): tủ sách
stool (n): ghế đẩu

II. grammar

* Cách thành lập danh từ số nhiều:
Ex: a table => tables
pen => pens

couch => couches
box => boxes

- Những danh từ kết thúc bằng “o,
x, sh, ch, ss” khi chuyển sang dạng
số nhiều ta phải thêm “es”.

* Cách Gt về số lượng đồ vật, người
There is + a / an / one + N.

There are + số lượng + N (sn).
Có………

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

T asks Ss to copy the table.
T: “Nghe kỹ cô giáo đọc và chú
ý tới cách phát âm của hậu tố
trong từ và phân theo 3 loại.”

desks, ruler, students, houses,
lamps, boxes windows,

benches, doors, books, clock,
tables, couches

/s/ /z/ /iz/

desks
students

books
clocks
lamps

rulers
tables
doors
windows

benches
couches
houses

boxes

IV. Summary

- Numbers 12 – 100 and pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/ /z/ /iz/) to count the
things in the classroom.

V. Homework

- Review Voc and Gr, Numbers 1 – 100.

- Do the exercises B1, 2, work book. B2, 5 P.36 - 37 Đếm các đồ vật trong bức tranh
và điền số lượng.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 25 / 9 / 09

UNIT 3: AT HOME

Lesson 4:

B3 – 5 P.37

Period:16

A. Objectives

- Using “How many … are there?” questions and futher practice in numbers to talk
about things in the classroom, livingroom, the home.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids

C. Methods:

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

The test for 15ms:

1. Write the plural nouns of these nouns.(2pts)

Table - ……… Couch - …………. Desk - …………. Book - ………..

2. Write the words of these numbers.(4pts)

30 - ……… 50 - …………. 60 - …………. 90 - ………..

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

-3. Fill in the space with the word(s) from the box.(4pts)

on a name is 30 are table that

My (1)…………. is Na. I’m twelve. I live (2)……… Tran Phu Street. I’m (3)……..
student. This (4) ……… my school. (5) ……….is my class. There is a (6) ………. In
my class and there (7)…….. 15 desks. I’m in class 6. There are (8)…… students in
my class.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(10p)
Step 3 (5p)

Further
Practice

Chain story

Ss work in groups of 3 to
talk about things in

classrom.

Eleciting Gr

Muốn biết số lượng bàn
trong phòng này em sẽ hỏi
ntn bằng TV?

Có bao nhiêu cái bàn?

Activity 1: Picture drll
B2 P. 36

B5 P. 37

Activity 2: T explains
some phrases

Activity 3: Survey

Ex:

S1: There is a table.

S2: There is a table and a door.

S3: There is a table, a door and a board.

I. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về số lượng:

How many tables are there?

- There is a / one table.

How many desks are there?
- There are ten desks.

How many + N (sn) + are there?
- There is a / an / one + N (s.it).
- There are + số lượng + N (sn).
* Chú ý: Trong câu trả lời có thể khơng
cần nhắc lại danh từ trong câu hỏi.
Ex: A: How many [desks] are there?
B: There are [six].

In your house
In your classroom
In your family

Names In your family In your house In your classroom

people chairs tables TVs desks windows

Nam 3 6

Ex: A: How many people are there in your family?
Nam: There are three.

IV. Summary (2p)

- Using “How many … are there?” questions and futher practice in numbers to talk
about things in the classroom, livingroom, the home.

V. Homework (3p)

- Review Gr & Voc, do the exercises A3, 4 + B 1, 2 3 4 workbook. (Hoàn thành hội
thoại dựa vào mẫu câu hỏi đáp về số lượng)

- B4: Viết các mẩu hội thoại (hỏi và trả lời về số lượng đồ đạc trong mỗi bức tranh đã
cho) sử dụng mẫu câu mới học.

Evaluation

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 28 / 9 / 09

UNIT 3: AT HOME

Lesson 5:

C1 – 2 P. 38 - 39

Period: 17

A. Objectives

- Reading a text about a family to understand the details and talk about jobs.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: Poster, picture, wordcues
C. Methods:

Write it up, Net work, Open prediction, Noughts & crosses, wordcue drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

Write it up: (10p)

From Survey Lesson 4 write the sentences.
Eg: There are three people in Nam’s family.

T explains: Nam’s ….

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(10)

Step 2
While
reading

Eleciting Voc
Expaination
Picture
Picture
Situation
Explaination

Activity 1: Net work
Ss work in 2 teams

Activity 2: Open prediction
Ss work with the partners

I. Vocabulary
engineer (n): kỹ sư

doctor (n): bác sĩ
nurse (n): y tá

farmer (n): nông dân
worker (n): công nhân

doctor
teacher

farmer
II. Read

(15p)

Lan’s family

How old…? What does he / she do?

Father 40 Engineer

Mother 35 Teacher

Brother 8 Student



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

Step 3(5p)
Post
reading

Lan 15 Student

Ss read the text P. 38 then check their predictions
Answer the questions P. 38

a. There are four people in her family.

b. Her father is forty. c. He is an engineer.
d. Her mother is thirty five. e. She is a teacher.
f. Her brother is eight. g. He is a student.
h. They are in their livingroom.

Activity 3: Wordcue drill.

Ex: What is her / his name?
How old is he / she?

IV. Summary

- Voc about jobs and family, reading the text about Lan’s family.

V. Homework

- Review Voc arround the topic, read the text again carefully, do the exercises C1 –
C5 P. 23 – 27 work book.

- Do the exercises in Grammar practice P. 40 – 43.
- Review Gr & Voc from Unit 1 to Unit 3.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 29 / 9 / 09

UNIT 3: AT HOME

Lesson 1:

Grammar Practice

Period: 18

A. Objectives

- Further practice in “tobe”, Imperatives, Numbers, Question Words, “There is /
are…..” structure, Furniture Voc …..

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use Voc & Gr they’ve learnt to do the
exercises given.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids: Posters, cards, wordcues
C. Methods:

Gap fill, Bingo game, Crossword Puzzle, Gessing game, T /F repetition drill.
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A 02 / 10 / 09

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

II. Revision / Warmer

Bingo game: (8p)

- Ss choose 9 numbers, from 11 – 19 and the decimals: 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100.
- T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven, one hundred, thirty, sixty, eighteen, forty,
twelve, thirteen, fifteen, eighty, fourteen, twenty, fifty, sixteen, nineteen, ninety.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(7p)

Step 2
Practice

(19p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Eleciting Gr
Explaination

Activity 1: Gap
fill + Noughts & 
Crosses

- Ss work in 2
teams in the
game.

Activity 2:

Simonsays

Activity 3:

Gap fill

Activity 4:

T /F repetition 
drill.

Ss repeat if
the sentences are
T. keep silent
when the

sentences are F.

Activity 5:

Crossword Puzzle

I. Grammar
“tobe”: is, am, are

- am: Dùng với ĐT “I”.

- is: Dùng với ĐT He She It và dạng số ít
(“This, That……”).

- are: Dùng với các ĐT We You They và dạng số

nhiều (These, Those….).

* Gr Practice 1 – 3 P.40

They / teachers We / students She / nurse
He / an

engineer

She / my
friends

They / sisters
You / 12 We / brothers I / Ba

* Gr Practice 4 P. 40
* Gr Practice 6 P. 41
a. What c. Who
b. Where d. What
* Gr Practice 5 P. 41
Picture B5 P. 37.

There’s a telivision. (repeat)
There are three stools. (silent)
There are four people. (repeat)
There’s an armchair. (silent)
There are two lamps. (silent)
There’s a stereo. (repeat)
There’s a board. (silent)
There’s a bookself. (repeat)

* Gr Practice 10 P. 42

1. chair 2. book 3. eraser 4. ruler
5. door 6. clock 7. board 8. window

IV. Summary (2p)

- Further practice in “tobe”, Imperatives, Numbers, Question Words, “There is /
are…..” Furniture Voc …..

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Gr + Voc in Unit 1 – Unit 3.

- Do the exercises in Grammar Practice and in these units to prepare for the Test.

Evaluation

……….
……….

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

-……….
……….
Date of preparing: 02 / 10 / 09

TEST FOR 45ms

Period: 19

A. Objectives

- Using “tobe”, Imperatives, Numbers, Question Words, “There is / are…..”

structure, Furniture Voc …..

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr & Voc they’ve learnt to do the
exercises given.

- Improve Ss’ skills in doing exercises.

B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, note papers, pens…

C. Methods: : Gap fill, Matching, write it up, Multiple choice,
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A 05 / 10 / 09

6B 05 / 10 / 09

II. Revision / Warmer
III. New lesson

Step 1: Pre testing (2p)

- T gives the testing papers to Ss then Ss check the exercises.
- T helps Ss if necessary.

Step 2: While testing (40p)

- Ss do the exercises individually, T monitors the class.

The contents of the test

I. Listen and underline the words you hear.(2pts)

(1) Hello / Hi. My name is (2) BETH / BRED. I am (3) twelve / twenty years old. I
am a (4) student / teacher. I live (5) on / in Tran Phu street. I am in class 7(6) A / B.
There are three (7) windows / tables in my house, and there is a (8) door / board.

II. Write the plural nouns of these nouns. (1pt)

Table - ……… Bench - …………. Eraser - …………. Pen - ………..
III. Match the questions with their answers. (2pt)

1. Who is that? a. I am thirteen.

2. What are these? b. That is my English teacher.
3. How many tables are there? c. I am Lan

4. What’s your name? d. They are pencils.

5. How old are you? e. There are fifteen tables.
IV. Order the words (phrases) to make maeningful sentences. (2pts)

Ex: book / this / a / is. => This is a book.

1. is / my / father / this.

=> This …………...

3. where / you / do / live?

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

2. is / a/ that / school bag.

=>………

4. in / living-room / our / we / are.

=>……….
V. Circle the best one to complete the sentences. (3pts)

1. A: Good afternoon! B : ………!

a. good morning b. good bye c. good afternoon

2. This ………… Peter.

a. are b. is c. am

3. How are you? – We ………fine, thank you.

a.are b. is c. am

4. Good morning children. How are you?

a. I am fine, thanks b. We are nine years old. c. We are fine, thanhk you.
5. Hoa: Hello, Ba. This is Nga. => Ba : ………..

a. Fine, thanks b. Hello Nga c. I am well, thanks
6. ………. that your classroom?

a. Are b. Is c. Am

7. Is this ………eraser?

a. your b. a c. you

8. ……….do you spell your name?

a. Where b. How c. Who

9. How many ………….are there?

a. couch b. couches c. a couch

11. What does he do? - ……. …….an engineer.

a. She is b. He is c. His is

12. A: ………? - That’s my brother.

a. is that a pen ? b. What is that? c. Who is that?
Step 3: Post testing(2p)

- T collects the testing papers.

IV. Summary (1p)
- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done.

V. Homework

- Review Gr + Voc in Unit 1 – Unit 3.
- Review the possesive pronouns

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….

UNIT 4:

BIG OR SMALL

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Identify possession.

- Describe location and size of school.
- Describe location of objects.

- Describe everyday activities.

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

-- Ask for and say the time.
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 2 Reading a describtion of school with practice

in possessive “’s” to talk about possessions.

P. 44
Lesson 2 A 3 - 5 Reading a text about school to understand the

details and get further practice in numbers and
school Vocabulary.

P. 45 - 46
Lesson 3 B 1 - 5 Listening to a dialogue about school to

understand the details, pratice cardinal
numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which”
questions to talk about school.

P. 47 - 48

Lesson 4 C 1 - 2 Simple Present tense, positive statements with

I Voc of routines to talk about habitual actions.

P. 37
Lesson 5 C 1 & 3 Simple present tense, positive statements with

He, She to talk about habitual actions.

P. 49

Lesson 6 C 4 - 7 Telling the time P. 50 - 51

Date of preparing: 05 / 10 / 09

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 2 P. 44

Period: 20

A. Objectives

- Reading a describtion of school with practice in possessive “’s” to talk about
possessions.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
B. Teaching aids: CD players, picture,

C. Methods: Pelmanism, Matching, Comprehension questions, Yes / No
Questions.

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

Pelmanism: Ss work in 2 teams. (10p)

I Thu

Your
Her

His
Thu’s

You
She

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(10p)

Step 2
While
reading

(15p)

Step 3
Post

reading

(5p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture draw
Picture draw
Explaination
Explaination

Rub out & remember
Activity 1: Matching

Predict
Activity 2:

Read and check the
predictions.

Activity 3:

Comprehension 
questions

- T presents some points
of Gr used in the text.

Activity 4: Yes /No Qs
Phong’s school

Thu’s school
Your house
Your school

Your brother’s school
Your sister’s school
Activity 5:

Chain game

Ss work in groups of 3

I. Vocabulary
big (a): to, lớn

small (a): nhỏ, bé

in the country: ở nông thôn
in the city: ở thành phố

II. Reading A1 P. 44

big Phong’s school
in the country Thu’s school
in the city small

* Answer the questions.

a. Yes it is. b. No, It isn’t.
c. Phong’s school is in the cuontry.

d. No, It isn’t.

* Grammar

Ex: Thu’s school: Trường học của Thu
“’s” => Dùng để xác định quyền sở hữu (sở
hữu cách).

Cách nói miêu tả có tính từ:
Ex: Thu’s school is big.

S + tobe + Adj.
Tobe + S + Adj?

- Yes, S + tobe - No, S + tobe not.
Ex: A: Is Phong’s school big?

B: No, It isn’t.

A: Is Phong’s school small?
B: Yes, It is.

Ex: Hoa’s pen

Hoa’s pen and Cuc’s book.

Hoa’s pen, Cuc’s book and Nga’s eraser

IV. Summary

- Reading a describtion of school with practice in possessive “’s” to talk about
possessions.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, read the text A 1 carefully then answer the Qs again.
- Do the exercises A 1 – 3 P. 35 – 36 work book.

A1: Hoàn thành các câu giới thiệu về đồ đạc có sử dụng sở hữu cách.
A2: Viết câu miêu tả đồ vật dựa vào từ gợi ý.

A3: Viết câu KĐ và câu NV dựa vào từ gợi ý để hỏi về nơi chốn.

Evaluation

……….

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

-……….
……….
Date of preparing: 06 / 10 / 09

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 2:

A 3 – 5 P.45 - 45

Period: 21

A. Objectives

- Reading a text about school to understand the details and get further practice in
numbers and school Vocabulary.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English

B. Teaching aids: Cards, poster
C. Methods:

Bingo game, Answers given, Comprehension Qs, Transformation
writing

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)
Bingo game: T elecits & list numbers on the board:

6 8 12 20 200 23 52 41 400 17 100 25 600 900 10
Ss choose 5 numbers from the board.

- T reads: 6 25 200 12 17 400 8 900 20 52

III. New lesson
 Step 1: Pre – reading (5p)

Open predictions

- Ss guess what these numbers are about, to do with school: 400 900 8 20

Ex: students, teachers, windows, desks…..

Step 2: While - reading (20p) A 3 P. 45

- Ss read the text then correct their predictions

400, 900: students 8, 20: classrooms
- Answers given:

Answers given Answer Key

1. in the country
2. 8

3. 400

4. in the city
5. No, It isn’t.
6. 20

7. 900

1. Where is Phong’s school?

2. How many classrooms are there in Phong’s school?
3. How many students are there in Phong’s school?

4. Where is Thu’s school?

5. Is it small?

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

Ss work with the partners, read the texts then make questions for the answers.

Step 2: Post - reading (7p)
A 4 P. 46

Transformation writing

- From the text about Phong’s school, write a paragraph about your school.
Ex: My school is in the country. It is small. There are … There are….

IV. Summary

- Reading a text about school to understand the details and get further practice in
numbers and school Vocabulary.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, read the texts above again carefully, answer the Qs (a - d) P. 45.
- Practice play with words P. 46, review the numbers 1 – 100.

- Do the exercises A 4 5 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….

……….
Date of preparing: 09 / 10 / 09

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 3:

B 1 - 5 P. 47 - 48

Period: 22

A. Objectives

- Listening to a dialogue about school to understand the details; pratice cardinal
numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” questions to talk about school.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, poster
C. Methods:

Sing a song, Gap fill, rub out & remember, board drill, grid
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)

- Sing the “Ten little Indians” song.

- T helps Ss to sing the song.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
listening

Eleciting Voc
Examples
Real life

I. Vocabulary
grade (n): lớp

floor (n): tầng, nền

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

-(10p) Explainations

Rub out & remember
T explains the ordinary
numbers.

Activity 1: Predict Dialogue

and (lt): và

II. Ordinal numbers

The first = 1st The sixth = 6th

The second = 2nd The seventh =7th

The third = 3rd The eighth = 8th

The fourth = 4th The nineth = 9th

The fifth = 5th The tenth = 10th

Step 2
Practice

(17p)

Ss predict the
information then
fill in the blanks.
Activity 2:

Listen and correct
the predictions.

Activity 3: Grid

Thu: Hello, Which grade are you in?
Phong: I’m in grade (1)………
Thu: And Which class are you in?
Phong: (2)…………..What about you?

Thu: I’m in grade (3)…... , class (4)………
How many floors does your school have?
Phong: (5) ………. It’s a small school.

Thu: My school has (6)…….floors and my class is
on the (7) …… floor. Where’s your classroom?
Phong: It’s on the (8) ………..floor.

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Ss listen then complete the table.

* Cách hỏi đáp về lớp
học.

Ex: Which grade are you
in?

- I am in grade 6.

Board drill : Using the grid to ask and answer about Phong’ s & Thu’s.
Ex: Which class is Thu in? - She is in class 7.

Ss work in pairs.

IV. Summary

- Cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” questions to talk about school.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Gr & Voc, the ways to ask about class, grade.
- Do the exercises B 1 – 4 P. 38 – 40.

B1: Hoàn thành hội thoại (dựa vào cáh hỏi đáp về lớp học).
B2: Viết các câu văn dựa vào câu mẫu a đã cho.

B4: Viết câu hỏi và trả lời dựa vào tranh đã cho và câu mẫu.
- Complete B 5 P. 48 in Ss’ book. (Hoàn thành hội thoại)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Which grade + tobe + S + in?
class

- S + tobe + in grade / class …..
Name Grade Class Classroom

Thu 7 2nd

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

Date of preparing: 12 / 10 / 09

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 4:

C 1 – 2 P.49

Period: 23

A. Objectives

- Simple Present tense, positive statements with I Voc of routines to talk about
habitual actions.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, cards (word cues)

C. Methods: Slap the board, Word cue drill, Chain game
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 15 / 10 / 09 Cường, Ninh

6B 15 / 10 / 09 Khưyên, Nhất

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Chatting: Ss work in closed pairs

Ex: Which grade / class are you in? - I am in ……

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(10p)

Step 3
Further

Eleciting Voc
Actions

Actions
Actions
Actions
Explainations
Situations
Slap the board

Set the sence: Muốn 
biết việc làm của cô 
vào mỗi sáng em sẽ 
hỏi cô ntn?

Activity 1:
Word cue drill

Activity 2:
Chain game

I. Vocabulary
(to) get up: thức dậy

(to) get dressed: mặc quần áo
(to) brush teeth: đánh răng
(to) wash face: rửa mặt
(to) have breakfast: ăn sáng
(to) go to school: đến trường

II. Grammar

Cách hỏi đấp về các việc làm hằng ngày.
What do you do every morning?

- I get up
brush my teeth
have breakfast

Ex: What do you do everymorning?
- I get up.



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-…. up …. dress …. school

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

Practice
(8p)

Ss work in groups of 3 Ex: S1: I get up

S2: I get up and I brush my teeth

S3: I get up, I brush my teeth and I get

dressed.

IV. Summary

- Simple Present tense, positive statements with I Voc of routines to talk about
habitual actions.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc & Gr, practice C1 P. 49 fluently.
- Do the exercise C 1 P.41 work book.

(Nối các từ ở cột A với các từ ở cột B để tạo thành cụm từ có nghĩa)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 13 / 10 / 09

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 5:

C 1 & 3 P. 49

Period: 24

A. Objectives

- Simple present tense, positive statements with He, She to talk about habitual
actions.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Pictures, word cues, CD players

C. Methods: Write it up, Word cue drill, Matching, Explaination
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A 16 / 10 / 09

6B 16 / 10 / 09

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)

Matching:

(to) get up

(to) get dressed
(to) brush teeth
(to) wash face
(to) go to school
(to) have breakfast

(to) say hello to clasmates
(to) go to the clasroom
Hello

Lop 6 A

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(10p)
Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc

Muốn biết bạn Ba làm 
gì vào mỗi sáng em sẽ 
hỏi cơ ntn?

- Ba làm gì váo mỗi 
sáng?

- T explains clearly.

Activity 1:

Word cue drill

T uses the cues from
matching above

Activity 2: Write it up

Ss work individually.

I. Grammar
Thì hiện tại đơn.

What does Ba do every morning?
- He gets up.

brushes his teeth.
has breakfast.
goes to school.

What does + Ba do every morning?
- S + V(s/es) + O.

- Khi chủ từ là ngôi thứ 3 số ít (He, She, It, 
Lan) thì ta phải chia động từ bằng cách 
thêm “s” hoặc “es” vào sau động từ. (Với 
những động từ kết thúc bằng “o”, “sh” 
“ss”, “x”, “ch” thì ta thêm “es”).

* have => has

II. Practice

Ex: What does Ba do every morning?
- He gets up.

* C3 P.49

a. Every morning Ba gets up. He gets 
dressed. He….

b. Every morning I get up. I get dressed ….

IV. Summary

- Simple present tense, positive statements with He, She to talk about habitual
actions.

V. Homework (7p)

- Review Gr & Voc, finish the writings C1 (a,b) above.
- Do the exercises C 1 2 P. 41 work book.

C2: Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc.
VD: a. gets up

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 16 / 10 / 09

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

Lesson 6:

C 4 – 7 P.50 - 51

Period: 25

A. Objectives

- Further practice in numbers, pratice in telling the time
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

-B. Teaching aids: CD players, real objects, word cues

C. Methods: Numbers dictations, Object drill, Word cue drill, Noughts & Crosses
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 19 / 10 / 09 Lan Anh, Mạnh

6B 19 / 10 / 09 Hoàng, Nga

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)

Numbers dictations:

T reads: 1 10 30 35 15 20 25
45 50 40 5 8 55 9 12

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(10p)

Step 3 (8p)
Further
Practice

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Situation

Rub out & remember

- Set the sence:

T: Muốn biết thời gian lúc 
này em sẽ hỏi ntn bằng TV?

S: - Bây giờ là mấy giờ?

Activity 1: Real object drill
Activity 2: Word cue drill

Activity 3:

Noughts & crosses

Ex: What time is it?
- It’s six ten.

I. Vocabulary
time (n):

o’clock (n):

past (gt):
half (n):

(to) be late for school:
II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về giờ.

What time is it?
- It is + [giờ] - phút.

- It is + phút – past - [giờ]
- It is + phút – to – [giờ]
* 30p = half 15p = a quarter
Ex: What time is it?

- It is ten o’clock.

Ex: What time do you get up?
- I get up at six.

6.10 2.30 16.45

7.00 11.25 20.30

3.15 4.20 5.30

IV. Summary

- Numbers, ways in telling the time.

V. Homework (7p)
- Review Gr & Voc, practice telling the time fluently.
- Do the exercises C 3 – 6 P. 41 – 43 work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Describe everyday routine.
- Describe school timetables.
- Ask for and say the time.
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects

III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 2 Simple present tense with I vs, He, She to talk
about daily routine.

P. 52 - 53
Lesson 2 A 3 - 4 Simple Present tense “Wh” questions with He /

She to talk about other people’s daily routine.

P. 53 - 54
Lesson 3 A 5 - 6 Simple present tense Y /N Questions and short

answers to talk about daily routine.

P. 54 - 55
Lesson 4 B 1 - 3 Reading a story about Ba’s daily routine to

practice Simple present tense.

P. 58
Lesson 5 C 1 School subjects Voc with “have / Don’t have”

to talk about the school timetable.

P. 59
Lesson 6 C 2 - 3 Days of the week Voc with “has / Don’t have”

to talk about the weekly timetable.

P. 60 – 61
Lesson 7 Grammar

practice

Further practice in simple present tense, telling
the time, Adjectives with “be” question words,
school subjects and Days of the week.

P. 60 - 61

Date of preparing: 17 / 10 / 09

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 2 P. 52 - 53

Period: 26

A. Objectives

- Simple present tense with I vs, He, She to talk about daily routine.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, posters

C. Methods: Guessing game, slap the board, Comprehension Qs, Substitution
drill, Survey, Write it up

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 20 / 10 / 09 Đức, Hiếu

6B 20 / 10 / 09 Đức, Kiên

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Guessing game

Ss choose a time and complete the sentence:

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

-Example exchange:
A: Is it half past eight?
B: No, It isn’t.

A: Is it nine fifteen?
B: Yes, It is

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(17p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc

Activity 1: Slap the board

Activity 2: Set the sence:
Picture P. 52

- Ss read the text then
answer the Qs

Activity 3:

Comprehension Qs

Ss do this with the
partners.

Every day I go to school.
Every day She goes to
school.

Activitiy 4:

Substitution drill

Ss: Everyday Nga gets up.
She brushes her teeth.
She washes her face.
She has breakfast.

She gets dressed.
She goes to chool.
She plays games.
………..

I. Vocabulary
(to) do homework: làm BTVN
(to) play games: chơi trò chơi

II. Read

a. Everyday Nga gets up at six.

b. Every morning Nga goes to school.
c. Every afternoon Nga plays games.
d. Every evening Nga does homework.

III. Grammar
Thì hiện tại đơn

* Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O

* Nghi vấn: Do + S + V(inf) + O ?

Does

T: Every day I get up at six
I brush my teeth.

I wash my face.

I have breakfast.
I get dressed.
I go to school.
I play games.

I do my homework.
Activity 5: Survey

Name Get up Get dressed Go to school Play games

Hoa 5.30 6. 15 6. 30

Ex: What time do you get up? - I get up at five thirty.
Activity 6: Write it up: Or Ss orally report back.

Everyday Hoa gets up at five thirty. She gets dressed at…

IV. Summary

- Simple present tense with I vs, He, She to talk about daily routine.
It’s ……[nine fifteen].

homework go to school

get dressed

play games
have

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, practice reading the sentences P. 52 again fluently.
- Do the exercises A 1 2 3 P. 44 – 45 work book.

A1: Viết dạng đúng của động từ đã cho.
A3: Viết các câu theo mẫu và tranh đã cho.

VD: a. What does she do? => She does her home work.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 19 / 10 / 09

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO

Lesson 2:

A 3 – 4 P. 53 - 54

Period: 27

A. Objectives

- Simple Present tense “Wh” questions with He / She to talk about other people’s
daily routine.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Pictures, poster, CD players

C. Methods: Ordering, Comprehension Qs , Picture drill, Noughts & Crosses

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 22 / 10 / 09 V. Tú, Ninh

6B 22 / 10 / 09 Trường, Nhất

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
1. Do the exercise A2/ 41 workbook (a - e)

Keys:

a. goes b. brush c. does d. do e. play

2. Do the exercise A2/ 41 workbook (f - j)
Keys:

f. go g. have h. watches i. play j. does

III. New lesson

Step 1

Presentation

(10p)

Eleciting Voc
Mime

Mime
Mime
Mime
Examples

Activity 1: Ordering

T reads: Every morning

I. Vocabulary
read (v): đọc

watch (v): xem, nhìn
write (v): viết

(to) listen to music: nghe nhạc
(to) do the housework: làm việc nhà

II. Listen and repeat A 3 P. 53

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

-Step 2
Practice

(12p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Lan gets up and listens to
music. Every afternoon
she comes home and
writes letters to her
friends, she does the
housework then she
watches TV. Every
evening she reads and
does her homework.

Activity2:Comprehensio
nQs A4 P. 54

Activity 3: Picture drill

A 3 P. 53

Ss work in closed pairs.

* Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về các hoạt động sau giờ

học.

What do you do after school?
- I watch TV

- I do the housework.
* Answer the Qs A4

a. She does the housework.
b. He watches television.
c. She reads.

d. He listens to music.
Example exchange:

A: What does Ba do after school?
B: He gets dressed.

Noughts & Crosses

He / play games She /do the housework Hoa / whatch TV
Nam / go to school Ba / get dressed Nga / write letter
He / have breakfast Mai / listen to music Lan / read

Ss work in 2 teams practice asking & ansewring as picture drill.

IV. Summary

- Simple Present tense “Wh” questions with He / She to talk about other people’s
daily routine.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice A 3 P. 53 fluently and carefully.
- Do the exercises A 4 5 6 P. 45 – 47 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 23 / 10 / 09

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO

Lesson 3:

A 5 – 6 P. 54 - 55

Period: 28

A. Objectives

- Simple present tense Y /N Questions and short answers to talk about daily routine.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Poster, word cues

C. Methods: Rub out & remember, Wordcue drill, Find S.O who, Pelmanism
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

6B 26 / 10 / 09 Phúc, Hoan

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)
Pelmanism

go to do listen to watch read

school homework music TV books

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(7p)

Eleciting Voc
Mime

Mime
Mime
Examples
Picture
Picture

Rub out & remember
Activity 1: Set the
sence

Picture P. 54
- Ss listen then
practice the dialogue.
Activity 2: T reminds
and presents the

Simple present tense.
Activity 3:

Wordcue drill

Ss practice with You/ I
And these names

Nam / play soccer 

Lan / play volleyball 

They / do sports 

Ba / play football 

Na / play soccer 

I. Vocabulary

(to) play volleyball: chơi bóng chuyền
football: chơi bóng đá
soccer: chơi bóng đá
(to) do sports: chơi thể thao
girl (n): cô bé

boy (n): cậu bé

II. Listen and repaeat A5/ 54
* Grammar

Thì hiện tại đơn
KĐ: S + V(s/es) + O

PĐ: Do / Does + S + V(inf) + O?

- Yes, S + do / does.
- No, S + do / does + not.

* Chú ý: Thể nghi vấn của thì hiện tại đơn ta

sử dụng “Do” hoặc “Does” làm trợ động 
từ. “Does” cho ngơi thứ 3 số ít, “Do” cho 
các ngơi cịn lại.

* Practice

1. Example exchange:
A: Do you play soccer?
B: Yes, I do

2. Example exchange:
A: Does Nam play soccer?
B: Yes, He does.

Find S.O who

A: Hello, What is yourt
name?

………..
A: Do you watch TV?
B: No, I don’t.

Nga: Yes, I do.

IV. Summary

- Simple present tense Y /N Questions and short answers to talk about daily routine.

V. Homework (5p)



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-Find S.O who…. Names

…..watch TV Nga

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- Review Voc & Gr, practice the dialogue A5 P. 54 fluently.
- Finish the task – Find S.O who above.

- Do the exercises A1 – A 6 / 44 – 47 work book, do the exercises I.2, II. 1, 2 / 28 –
29 VBT.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 24 / 10 / 09

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO

Lesson 4:

B 1 – 3 P. 56 - 57

Period: 29

A. Objectives

- Reading a story about Ba’s daily routine to practice Simple present tense.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Cards, Poster

C. Methods: Jumbled words, What & Where, Grids, Survey
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 29 / 10 / 09 Hoan, Hùng

6B 27 / 10 / 09 Thuỷ, Cường

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)
Jumbled words:

OKHUEOWSR = HOSEWORK YPAL = PLAY CTHWA = WATCH

MOHEOWKR = HOMEWORK AEDR = READ TISLEN = LISTEN

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(12p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Actions
Situation

Untonym >< start

Explaination

Untonym >< get up
What & where

I. Vocabulary

(to) take a shower: tắm bằng vòi hoa sen
eat (v): ăn

start (v): bắt đầu
finish (v): kết thúc
(to) have lunch: ăn trưa
(to) go to bed: đi ngủ

II. Read



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



- 45 - play

game
finish

take a shower eat dinner

have luch
go to bed

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

Step 2
While
reading

(12p)

Step 3
Post
reading

(8p)

Activity 1:
Open prediction

Ss fill in the times in the
table for Ba without
reading. B 2 P. 57
Activity 2: Grid
Ss work individually
Read B 1 / 56 then
correct the open
predictions

Activity 3: Survey

Ss work in closed pairs
then open pairs.

1. Complete the table

ACTIONS TIME

Ba Me

Get up 6:00 5:30

Go to school
Classes start
Classes finish
Have luch
Go home
Go to bed

2. Practice speaking B 2 – 3 P. 57
Example exchange:

a. What time do you get up ?
- I get up at 5:30

b. What time does Ba get up ?
- Ba gets up at 6:00

IV. Summary

- Voc about daily routine, present simple tense

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, read the story about Ba B1 / 56 again carefully.
- Do the exercises B 1 – 4 P. 47 – 50 work book.

B1: Viết câu hỏi (về thời gian) cho các câu trả lời.
B2 : Viết câu hỏi và câu trả lời.

- Do the exercies I.2, II P. 29, 30 VBT

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 26 / 10 / 09

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO

Lesson 5:

C 1 P. 58

Period: 30

A. Objectives

- School subjects Voc with “have / Don’t have” to talk about the school timetable
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

-B. Teaching aids: Poster, wordcues

C. Methods: Wordsquare, Ordering Voc, Wordcues drill, Mapped dialoge
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 30 / 10 / 09 Cảnh, Hai

6B 29 / 10 / 09 Phúc, Thêm

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Wordsquare:

start, to, old, go, sports, TV, take, eat
homework, listen, do, play, work, read,

watch, at, finish, music, on

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2

Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Real object
Explaination
Situation
Explaination
Picture
Situation
Explaination
Ordering

T reads: First we have
Literature, and we have
Geography. At eight
o’clock we have English
and then we have Math. At
ten fifteen we have

History. This is our
timetable on Monday.
Activity 1: Picture Drill
Activity 2: Word cue drill
Example exchange:

A: What do we have
today?

B: We have English.

A: What time does it start ?
B: Seven o’clock.

Activity 3:

I. Vocabulary
a timetable : 1 thời gian biểu
Monday (n) : Thứ 2

English (n): môn Tiếng Anh
Math (n): môn Tốn

Literature (n): mơn Văn
Geography (n): mơn Địa lí
History (n): môn Lịch sử

II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về môn học

What do we have today ?
- We have English

- I don’t have my timetable.
* C1 / 53

Ex: A: What do we have today ?
B: We have English

H O M E W O R K

S L I S T E N T

T D O P L A Y A

A G W O R K O K

R O N R E A D E

T W A T C H T E

T M U S I C V A

O F I N I S H T

English / 7.00

Geography / 10.15
Literature / 8.40

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

Step 3
Further
Practice
(10p)

Mapped dialogue
A: What do we have
today?

B: We have History.
A:What time does it start?
B: At sevenfifty.

A: Do we have literature at
8.40?

B: No, We don’t. We have
English.

A: What time does it
finish?

B: At 9.25

What ……today ? History
What time ……..start ? 7.50
Do we …Literature …

8.40?

No …
English
What time ….finish ? 9.25

What ….have …9.35 ? Geography

Do we ….math ? Yes…

10.15

IV. Summary

- School subjects Voc with “have / Don’t have” to talk about the school timetable

V. Homework (5p)
- Practice C 1 2 3 again fluently, review Gr & Voc

- Do the exercises II.3 ,IV 1 2 / 31 VBT, exercises C 1 – 4/ 50 – 52 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 30 / 10 / 09

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO

Lesson 6:

C 2 – 3 P. 59

Period: 31

A. Objectives

- Days of the week Voc with “has / Don’t have” to talk about the weekly timetable.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.
B. Teaching aids: Posters

C. Methods: Slap the board, Matching, Predict Dialogue, Board drill, Write it up
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 03 / 11 / 09 Hiên, Hồng

6B 02 / 11 / 09 Thương, Linh

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
Slap the board



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



Math- 48 - History Geograph

y
Literature English
Monday

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(5p)

Step 2
Practice

(20p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Eleciting Voc
Matching

Ss work with the partners

Activity 1:
Predict Dialogue

- Ss guess the information
to fill in the missing words.
- Read C 3 / 59 then correct
your predictions

Activity 2: Board drill

I. Vocabulary

Monday thứ bảy

Tuesday thứ năm

Wednesday thứ ba

Thursday thứ sáu

Friday thứ tư

Saturday chủ nhật

Sunday thứ hai

II. Practice

Nga: When do we have History ?

Ba: We have it on Tuesday and Thursday.
Nga: When do we have Math ?

Ba : We have it on Monday, Wednesday,
and Friday.

Nga: Does Lan have math on Friday ?
Ba : No, She doesn’t.

Activity 3: Write it up

- Ss work individually writing their own timetable using the words
they’ve learnt in C1/ 58

Ex: I have math on Friday, …… and ……
 I have English on ……….

IV. Summary

- Days of the week Voc with “has / Don’t have” to talk about the weekly timetable.

V. Homework

- Review Voc C 2 / 59, practice C3 / 59 fluently.

- Do the exercises C 1 2 3 / 50 51 workbook, exercises Gr Practice 1 – 7 P.60 - 61

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 02 / 11 / 09

GRAMMAR PRACTICE

P. 60 - 61

Period: 32

A. Objectives

Thứ 2 Thứ 3 Thứ 4 Thứ 5 Thứ 6 Thứ 7

Toán Văn Toán Anh Văn Toán

Toán Văn Toán Thể dục Văn Sinh

Sử Anh Địa Mĩ thuật Sử Địa

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Further practice in simple present tense, teliing the time, Adjectives with “be”
question words, school subjects and Days of the week.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: wordcues, posters, pictures

C. Methods: Dictations, Gap fill, word cue drill, Find S.O who, word cue drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 06 / 11 / 09 Hà, Linh

6B 05 / 11 / 09 Hoan, Phong

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Dictations

Teacher reads: one fourty five, five thirty, eight fifty, twelve o’clock, six twenty, half
past three, eleven fifteen, ten twenty five, three oh five, two forty, half past six, nine
o’clock, four thirty five.

The keys:

1:45 5:30 8:40 12:00 6:20 3:30 11:15 10: 25 3:05 2:40 6:30 9:00 4:35

III. New lesson

1. Telling the time (5p)
Picture drill Gr P 2 / 60

Example exchange: What time is it ? – It is seven o’clock

Ss practice with the partners

2. Questions words (Gr P. 4 / 61) (8p)

Noughts & crosses

a. Where d. How

b. How e. Where

c. What Which

LeLoi street Two floors N-G-A

Literature 6:00 Ba

Tuesday I play soccer Grade 6
Ex: What do we have today?

- Literature.

3. Adjectives with “be” (Gr P. 3 / 61) (5p)

Word cue drill

Ex: Is your house big ?
- Yes, it is / No, it isn’t
- Ss work with the partners
4. Present simple tense (15p)

- used to talk about daily routine, sports you like, school subjects
Find S.O who

Example exchange:
A: Do you get up at five?
B: No. I don’t.

Binh: Yes, I do

Find S.O who….. Name

get up at five Binh

Go to bed at 10:00
Have breakfast at 6:15
Go to school at 12:00
Play volleyball after school



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-house

room school

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

* School subjects:
Word cue drill:

Ex: When do we have Literature ?
- We have it on Monday.
* Gap fill Gr P. 1 / 60

- Ss do this individually

IV. Summary

- Further practice in simple present tense, telling the time, Adjectives with “be”
question words, school subjects and Days of the week.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc in Unit 4 – 5 again carefully, do all the tasks above again.
- Do the exercises Reading P. 53 – 56, Test yourself P. 57 – 59 workbook.
(BT reading cần đọc và dịch sang tiếng Việt)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

UNIT 6:

PLACES

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Give personal details.
- Describe places.
- Describe location.
- Describe surroundings.
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 3 Reading a text about where Thuy lives to
understand the details and practice Voc.

P. 62 - 63
Lesson 2 A 4 - 5 Town and country Voc for describing places

where we live.

P. 64
Lesson 3 B 1 - 2 Reading a text about where Minh lives to

understand town Voc and prepositions of place

P. 65 - 66
Lesson 4 B 3 Practice in prepositions of place: in, on, near,

next to… and town and country Voc.

P. 67
Lesson 5 C 1 - 2 More prepositions of place: in front of, to the

left / to the right of … to describe the position
of a house.

P. 68 - 69
Lesson 6 C 3 - 4 “Where is / are …” Qs and prepositions of

place to describe a street.

P. 70 - 71
Date of preparing: 02 / 11 / 09

Sat
Mon

Fri

Wed
Thu

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

UNIT 6 : PLACES

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 3 P. 62 - 63

Period: 33

A. Objectives

- Reading a text about where Thuy lives to understand the details and practice Voc.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating expecialy reading skill.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Posters, pictures
C. Methods:

What & Where, Open predictions, Matching, Comprehension Qs, Write it up
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A 05 / 11 / 09

6B 06 / 11 / 09

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
“Seven little Indians” song

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(12p)

Step 2
While
reading

(18p)

Eleciting Voc
Examples
Examples
Real life
Picture

Explainations
Picture

Ordering Voc

T reads the second bubble
“It’s beautifull here …….”
- open predictions

Ss guess things near Thuy’s
house ex: river

Activity 1:

Read & correct predictions
Activity 2: Matching

Ss work with the partners

Activity 3:

Comprehension Qs

Ss do this individually then
teacher asks for the answers
Activity 4: Write it up

I. Vocabulary

lake (n): cái hồ (2)
river (n): dịng sơng (1)
tree (n): cái cây (4)
rice paddy (n): cánh đồng lúa (6)
park (n): công viên (3)
flower (n): bông hoa (5)

II. Read
Thuy’s house

Lake park Hotel

near xinh đẹp

a yard khách sạn

beautiful gần

a hotel sân

* Answer the Qs

a. She is twelve. d. He’s twenty.
b. She’s a student. c. He is Minh.
e. She lives in a house

f. The house is near a lake, there is a
river and a lake, there is a hotel ….

III. Write

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

-Step 3
Post
reading

(5p)

Ss do this individually
Activity 5:

Picture cue drill P. 63
Ex: What is this ?
- It’s a yard.

Ex: Our house has a yard. It is near a 
rice paddy.

There is a hotel near the lake.
There is a river and a park.

There are trees and flowers in the park.

IV. Summary

- Reading a text about where Thuy lives to understand the details and practice Voc.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Gr & Voc, read the text A1 again carefully.
- Do the exercises A 1 – 3 / 60 – 63 workbook.

A1: ex: a) What is this ? – This is a house.
A2: b) There are two armchairs.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 06 / 11 / 09

UNIT 6 : PLACES

Lesson 2:

A 4 – 5 P. 64

Period: 34

A. Objectives

- Town and country Voc for describing places where we live.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: Pictures, CD player, word cues

C. Methods: Bingo game, Picture drill, Chain game, Guessing game, Write it
up

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 10 / 11 / 09 Ngọc, Hoàng

6B 09 / 11 / 09 Phong, Thuỷ

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
Listen A4 / 64: Ss listen and write the words they hear.
T reads: 1. There is a hotel near the park.

2. They live in the country.

3. The rice paddy is on the Mekong river.

The keys: a. Hotel b. Country c. Rice paddy, river.

III. New lesson

Step 1

Pre task

Eleciting Voc
Explaination

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

(10p)

Step 2
While
task
(15p)

Step 3
Post
task
(5p)

Situation
Examples
Explaination
Bingo game

Ss write 5 words in country Voc
Unit 6

Listen then tick

Activity 1: Picture drill A4 / 64
Activity 2: Chain game

Ss work in groups of 3

T goes around to mornitor the
class.

Activity 3: Guessing game
Ss coplete the sentence trip.
Example exchange:

- Ss guess.

Activity 4: Write it up

Ss work individually Writing
sentences about their place.
A 5 / 64

village (n): ngôi làng, xã
city (n): thành phố

country (n): đất nước, quê hương
II. Practice

T reads: a house, a town, a city, a 
school, a tree, a river, a rice paddy, a
park, a street, a lake, a hotel, a 
village, a yard, a flower.

Example exchange:

There is a [hotel] near our house.
There are [trees] near our house.
Examples:

S1: There is a hotel near our house.

S2: There is a hotel and a school near

our house.

S3: There is a hotel, a school and park

near our house.

A: Is there a park near your house?
B:Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.
* Ex: There is a hotel near our house.

IV. Summary

- Town and country Voc for describing places where we live.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, Practice playing with words A 6 / 64 fluently.
- Do the exercises A 1 – 3 P. 60 – 62 work book,

- Do the exercises I.2, II.1 / 32 – 33 VBT.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 07 / 11 / 09

UNIT 6 : PLACES

Lesson 3 :

B 1 – 2 P. 65 - 66

Period: 35

A. Objectives



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- Reading a text about where Minh lives to understand town Voc and prepositions of
place, and practice Voc around the topic.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Poster, picture, CD player

C. Methods: Rub out and remember, slap the board, wordsquare, T / F
predictions, Comprehension checking, Gap fill.

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 11 / 11 / 09 Tú, Mạnh

6B 10 / 11 / 09 Thương, Phúc

II. Revision / Warmer

Rub out & remember A 6 / 64

Houses and parks
Flowers and trees
Lakes and rivers
We love those.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

Step 2
While
reading

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Explaination

Examples
Explaination
Picture
Explaination
Picture
Wordsquare

I. Vocabulary
store (n): cửa hàng

restaurant (n): nhà hàng
temple (n): miếu

hospital (n): bệnh viện
factory (n): nhà máy

museum (n): viện bảo tàng
stadium (n): sân vận động

II. Practice
City, river, house, my,

go, them, hour, uor,
museum, park, know,
street

Temple, our, yard, yes,
his, hotel, restaurant, room,
her, hospital

Go, town, rice, lake,
store, tree

stadium

- Ss work with the partners
Activity 1: T / F prediction
- Ss guess about Minh’s
house.

- Read & check T / F ones.
Activity 2:

C I T Y R I V E R H

H O U S E I M Y O O

T U G H S S C G O S

T R Y O T T H E M P
E P E T A H O U R I

M U S E U M I R H T

P Y H L R D T S E A

L A I P A R K O R L

E R S T N K N O W S
X D S S T R E E T N

1. T / F statements

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

Step 3
Post
reading

Comprehension Qs
Ss work individually.
T explains:

work (v): làm việc

neighborhood (n):khu vực 
lân cận, xung quanh

Activity 3: Gap fill
Ss work individually.

a) F c) F e) F

b) T d) T f) F

3. Complete the sentences.
a) …..city.

b) …….restaurant, …bookstore, …temple.
c) ……..hospital.

d) ….house……..store.
e) …………factory.

IV. Summary

- Reading a text about where Minh lives to understand town Voc and prepositions of
place, and practice Voc around the topic.

V. Homework

- Review Voc, read the passage carefully & fluently, do all the tasks above again.
- Do the exercises B 1 / 62 work book, exercises II.1, II.2, III / 32 – 35 VBT.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 09 / 11 / 09

UNIT 6 : PLACES

Lesson 4 :

B 3 - 4 P. 67

Period: 36

A. Objectives

- Practice in prepositions of place: in, on, near, next to… and town and country Voc.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, pictures, poster

C. Methods: Jumbled words, Multiple choice , Gap fill, Matching, Word cue

drill, Noughts & Crosses
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 13 / 11 / 09 T. Tú, Thi

6B 12 / 11 / 09 Thêm, Tuấn

II. Revision / Warmer (15p)
* Jumbled words

STAUMDI = STADIUM TYIC = CITY RESTRANTUA = RESTAURANT

TALHOSIP = HOSPITAL USEHO = HOUSE FAROTRY = FACTORY

- Ss work individually.

* Multiple choice (Listen and check B 3 / 67)

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

-Teacher reads: a) There are three museums in the city.

b) The bookstore is on the other side of the street.

c) She walks along the river every morning.
d) Children mustn’t play soccer on the street.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(5p)
Step 2
While
task
(15p)

Step 3
Post
task
(5p)

Activity 1: Gap fill

Ss work individually. Guess the
words to fill in the gaps.

- Read B 4 / 67 & correct.
Activity 2: Matching

I. Complete the passage.

“I live in a …………on a …………..,

in a …………near a………… where
friends meet to …………. ”

- Ss work with the partners

Activity 3: Word cue drill
Example exchange:

A: Where do you live ?
B: I live in a [village].
A: Where do you live ?
B: I live near a [stadium].
Activity 4 :

Noughts & Crosses
T use the cues above.

next to
on
in

near

IV. Summary

- Prepositions of place: in, on, near, next to… and town and country Voc.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc, preposition of position.

- Do the exercise B 2 / 63 workbook.

Viết câu hỏi VD: We live in a city (Where) => Where do you live ?

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 13 / 11 / 09

UNIT 6 : PLACES

Lesson 5 :

C 1 – 2 P. 68 - 69

Period: 37

A. Objectives

- More prepositions of place: in front of, to the left / to the right of … to describe the
position of a house.

village

stadium
lake

Rice paddy river
city

temple

town

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: pictures, poster

C. Methods: Matching, Board drill, Comprehension Qs, Write it up
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 17 / 11 / 09 Mai, Hà

6B 16 / 11 / 09 V. Thương, Nga

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Bingo game: Ss write 4 places

T reads: Museum, Store, Hospital, River, Lake, Rice paddy, Restaurant, Hotel,
Factory, Temple, Stadium

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
task
(10p)

Step 2
While
task
(20p)

Step 3

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Real life
Real life
Real life
Board drill

Example exchange:
S1: Where is the tree?

S2: It’s [next to] the house

A. to the left of the house
B. behind the house

C. to the right of the house
D. in front of the house
E. next to the house
Activity 1:

T presents the text C 1 / 68

Comprehension Qs / 68
Ss work individually
T asks for the answers.
Activity 2: Multiple choice
Ss listen then find the right
pictures.

T reads: - Ba lives in a

beautiful house. There are a lot of
flowers in front of the house.
- There are tall trees to the right of
the house.

- Tuan’s house is very beautiful.
There are some flowers to the

I. Vocabulary
in front of : phía trước
behind : đằng sau

to the right of: phía bên phải
to the left of : phía bên trái
A B C

D E
II. Practice
1. Answer the Qs

a) It is in front of the house.

b) They are behind the house.
c) They are behind the trees.
d) It is to the left of the house.

e) They are to the right of the house.
f) It is in the country.

2. Listen and find the correct
pictures.

a) A b) B c) B

Ex: Tuan’s house is very beautiful.

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

-Post
task
(5p)

right.

Activity 3: Write it up

Ss write about Tuan’s house

There are flowers to the right. There
…….

IV. Summary

- More prepositions of place: in front of, to the left / to the right of … to describe the

position of a house.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc, read the text C 1 / 68 again carefully to get the details, finish exercise
writing above.

- Do the exercises II.3, IV / 34 – 36 VBT, C 1 2 3 / 63 – 65 work book.
Cat (n): con mèo opposite (gt): đối diện

- Do the Test yourself P. 57 – 59 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 14 / 11 / 09

UNIT 6 : PLACES

Lesson 6 :

C 3 – 4 P. 70 – 71

Period: 38

A. Objectives

- “Where is / are …” Qs and prepositions of place to describe a street.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids: CD players, poster, picture cues
C. Methods:

Picture cue drll, Guessing game, Pyramid, Bingo game, Chain game, Survey
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 19 / 11 / 09 Hoàng, Ninh

6B 17 / 11 / 09 Trang, Nhất

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
- T reminds Ss of places Voc ex: tree, river, rice paddy……..

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Explaination

Situation
Situation

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Step 2
While
reading

(15p)

Step 3
Post
reading

(5p)

Picture draw
Real life

Rub out & remember

Activity 1:

Comprehension Qs

T explains the Qs

Activity 2: Picture cue drill

Ex: Where is the restaurant?
- It is opposite the

drugstore.

Activity 3: Guessing game

C4 b) P. 71

Activity 4: Chain game

Ss work in groups of 3
Activity 5: Survey

A: What is (in front of) your
house ?

B: (flowers)

between (gt): ở giữa, giữa
opposite (gt): đối diện

II. Practice

1. Read the text and answer the Qs
Where is the ……….?
- It’s ………..
Cách hỏi đáp về vị trí :

Where is /are + the + ………?
- It is / They are + ……….

2. Speak

*A: It’s opposite the bakery.What is it?
B: It is the police station.

A: Yes. That’s right.

* A: There is a bakery near my house.
B: There is a bakery and a bookstore

near my house.

C: There is a bakery, a bookstore and a
police station near may house.
3. C 5 P. 71

Name in front of behind to the right of near opposite

Ba flowers trees well

IV. Summary

- “Where is / are …” Qs and prepositions of place to describe a street.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc and Gr, read the text C 3 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercise C 3 P. 64 – 65 work book.

- Do the exercises I. 1, II. 2, IV. 1,3 P. 32 – 36 VBT

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 02 / 10 / 09

TEST FOR 45ms

Period: 39

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

-A. Objectives

- Using “tobe”, Present simple tense, daily routine activity “There is / are…..”
structure, Place Voc …..

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr & Voc they’ve learnt to do the
exercises given.

- Improve Ss’ skills in doing exercises.

B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, note papers, pens…

C. Methods: : Gap fill, Matching, Ordering, Multiple choice, T / F statements
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A 05 / 10 / 09

6B 05 / 10 / 09

II. Revision / Warmer
III. New lesson

Step 1: Pre testing (2p)

- T gives the testing papers to Ss then Ss check the exercises.
- T helps Ss if necessary.

Step 2: While testing (40p)

- Ss do the exercises individually, T monitors the class.

The contents of the test

I. Listen and underline the words or phrases you hear.(2pts)

1. country bakery factory

2. museum stadium temple

3. rice paddy bakery park

4. restaurant hospital theater

5. bookstore drugstore toystore

6. tree rice paddy park

7. lake river well

8. behind infront of to the left of

II. Choose the best ones to complete the sentences (2pts)

1/ How old _________ he? (am, is, are)
2/ Lan _________ television every day. (watch, watches)

3/ There __________ four people in my family. (am, is, are)
4/ They __________ soccer after school. (play, plays, to play)
5/ I live ________ a house. (in, on, at)

6/ Ba gets up __________ six o’clock. (in, on, at)

7/ He ___________ breakfast every morning. (has, have, to have)
8/ _________ you brush your teeth? (do, does, to do)
III. Fill in each blank with one word from the box. (1,5 pt)

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

Lan: I go to school at (2)___________ .
Ba: (3)__________ do you have today?

Lan: It’s Monday. I have Math, Literature and History.
Ba: When do you have (4)_____________?

Lan: I have it on (5)__________ and Friday.
Ba: What do you do after school?

Lan: I (6)___________ volleyball.

IV. Read the passage and answer the questions:

Her name is Mai. She is eleven years old. She is a student. She lives in a small
house in the city. Her house is next to a park. She gets up at half past five and
brushes her teeth. She has breakfast goes to school at six thirty. The school is near
her house. Classes start at seven and end at eleven. She goes home at twelve o’clock.
She plays games after school. In the evening, She does her homework.

* Write True (T) or False (F): (0,5 pt)

______1/ Mai is 11 years old.

______2/ Her house is next to a school.
 * Answer the questions: (2,5 pts)

1. What is her name?

_______________________________________________________________

2. How old is she?

_______________________________________________________________

3. Where does she live?

_______________________________________________________________

4. What time does she go to school?

_______________________________________________________________

5. What does she do in the evening?

_______________________________________________________________

V. Order the words to make meaningful sentences. (1,5pt)
1. there / next / to / a / tree / my / house / is .

There is ………
2. you / what / do / after / do / school ?

What ………..
3. do / we / when / Math / Literature / and / have ?

When ………

The keys:

I. Listen

Teacher reads:

1. We live in a beautiful country.

2. Is there a toystore near your house? No, there is n’t. There’s a stadium.
3. I like bread of this bakery.

4. What is infront of your house? – It’s a restaurant.

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

-5. Is it a store? – Yes It is.

So what are there in the store? – many books.
6. There is a park near my house.

7. We often go swimming in that river.
8. The flowers are to the left of the house.
II. Choose the best ones to complete the sentences

1. is 2. watches 3. are 4. play 5. in 6. at 7. has 8. do
III. Complete the sentences

1. time 2. 6: 30 3. What 4. English 5. Tuesday 6. play
IV. Read

1. T 2. F
1. Her name is Mai.

2. She is eleven years old.

3. She lives in a small house in the city.
4. She goes to school at six thirty.
5. She plays games after school.
V. Order the sentences.

1. There is a tree next to my house.
2. What do you do after school?

3. When do we have Math and Literature?
Step 3: Post testing(2p)

- T collects the testing papers.

IV. Summary (1p)
- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done.

V. Homework

- Review Gr + Voc in Unit 4 – Unit 6.
- Review the possesive pronouns

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Unit 7: YOUR HOUSE

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Give personal details.
- Describe places.
- Describe location.
- Describe surroundings.
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 2 Listening to a dialogue and reading a letter
about a house to understand the details.

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

Lesson 2 A1,3 - 5 Facilities Voc with “Is there / are there any
…?” to describe the town.

P. 72 - 75
Lesson 3 B 1 Reading a text about Ba’s and Chi’s houses to

understand the differrences between town and
country.

P. 76 - 77
Lesson 4 B 2 - 3 Integrated skills practice to describe where we

live.

P. 77
Lesson 5 C 1 - 3 Simple present “How” Qs and “by car / bike /

bus…” to talk about transportation.

P. 78 - 80
Lesson 6 C 4 - 5 Reading a text about Hoang’s daily routine for

further practice in Simple Present habitual

actions.

P. 80 - 81
Date of preparing: 16 / 11 / 09

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Lesson 1:

A 1 + A 6 P. 72 - 73

Period: 40

A. Objectives

- Listening to a dialogue and reading a letter about a house to understand the details
and practice place Voc, Yes / No questions.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, posters,
C. Methods:

T / F statements, Open predictions, Comprehension Qs, Transfornmation writing
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 23 / 11 / 09 Hà, Nhuận

6B 19 / 11 / 09 Nga, Minh

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Matching:

Ss works individually.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
listening

(5p)

Activity 1:
T / F predictions
Ss tick Yes or No

I. Listen

Yes No

…… big? 



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-beautiful cao

old đẹp

big mới

new cũ

small to

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

Step 2
While
listening

(22p)

Step 3
Post
listening

(8p)

- Listen and correct
the open predictions
Activity 2: Recall
Ss use the grid to talk
about Hoa’s house.
Ex: Hoa’s house is 
small. It isn’t big. 
There is a yard. There
are flowers, there 
isn’t a well. There 
aren’t trees….

Activity 3: Gap fill
Ss listen and complete
the dialogue.

The keys

A 1 P. 71 Ss’ book.
Activity 4:

Dialogue build

Ss work chorally then
practice with the
partners.

- T asks some Ss to
practice aout of the
class.

…. small? 

… a yard? 

… a well? 

… flowers? 

… trees ? 

* Listen and complete the dialogue
Minh: (1)………your house big?

Hoa: No, (2)………..isn’t. It’s (3) ……….
Minh: Is it (4) ……….?

Hoa: (5) ………….It (6)………….
Minh: Is there a (7) ………..?
Hoa: (8) …… It (9) ……….
Minh: Is there a (10)………….?

Hoa: (11) …… there (12) …………..

Minh: Are there any (13) ………in your yard?
Hoa: (14)……..there (15)………
Minh: Are there any (16)……….?
Hoa: Yes, there are.

* Speak



….

big ? No. …..smalll.
….there a yard? Yes…..

Are …any  ? Yes…..

Are …any    ? No….

Ex: S1: Is your house big?

S2: No, it isn’t. It’s small.

S1: Is there a yard?

S2: Yes, there is.

S1: Are there any flowers in your yard?

S2: Yes, there are.

S1: Are there any trees?

S2: Yes, there are.

IV. Summary

- Listening to a dialogue and reading a letter about a house to understand the details
and practice place Voc, Yes / No questions.

V. Homework(5p)

- Review Voc and Gr, practice the dialogue A1 P. 72 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercise A 1, 2 P. 66 workbook.

A2: Ex: A: Is the hotel big?

B: No, it isn’t. It’s small.
A: Is it old?

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 23 / 11 / 09

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Lesson 2 :

A 3 – 5 P. 72 - 75

Period: 41

A. Objectives

- Facilities Voc with “Is there / are there any …?” to describe the town.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : pictures, CD players
C. Methods: Bingo game

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 27 / 11 / 09 Hồng, Thi

6B 23 / 11 / 09 Thương, Hân

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Bingo game: Ss write 5 names of places

T reads: museum, hospital, restaurant, rice paddy, lake, river, school, store, stadium,
temple, hotel, park.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
task
(15p)

Step 2
While
task
(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Picture draw
Explaination
Explaination

Rub out & remember

T reminds Ss of the Gr they’ve
learnt.

Activity 1: Picture drill

A 3 P. 74

Ex: Is there a lake ?
- Yes, there is.
- No, there isn’t.
Activity 2: Guessing game

Ss complete the sentence

I. Vocabulary
market (n): chợ

zoo (n): sở thú
church (n): nhà thờ
garden (n): vườn

post office (n): bưu điện
bank (n): ngân hàng

II. Grammar
Is / Are there ……….?

- Yes, there + tobe.
- No, there + tobe + not.
* any: vài, một vài

III. Practice

1. Speak

Ex: Is there a bank near your house?

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

-Step 3
Post
task
(5p)

There is a …..near my house.
Activity 3: Multiple choice

Ss listen and choose the right
picture.

Activity 4: Listen and draw
Ss work with the partners
Draw a house then describe
things around it.

- No, there isn’t / Yes, there is.
2. Listen

The keys: C

* A 6 P. 75 Listen and draw

IV. Summary

- Facilities Voc with “Is there / are there any …?” to describe the town.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice asking and answering with “is there / are there…..?”
- Do the exercises A 3 – 4 P. 66 – 67 workbook.

(Thành lập các đoạn hội thoại giống như hội thoại mẫu, sử dụng từ, cụm từ đã cho)
- Do the exercise B 1 P. 68 (Hoàn thành câu với “There is / are ………”)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 27 / 11 / 09

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Lesson 3 :

A 2 P. 73

Period: 42

A. Objectives

- Reading a letter describing a house to practice Voc about things around the house
and get to know form of a letter.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : poster, pictures

C. Methods:transformation writing, T / F predictions, What and Where, Chain
game

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 01 / 12 / 09 Tú, Trang

6B 30 / 11 / 09 Mạnh, Phong

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Chain game:

Ss work in groups of talking about things around the house
Ex: A: There is a tree near my house.

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

C: There is a tree, a stadium and a rice paddy near my house.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(8p)

Step 2
Practice

(17p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Real object
Picture
Picture P. 73
Situation
Situation

- What & Where

Activity 1:

T / F predictions

- Ss guess the T / F ones
- Read the letter then
correct the predictions
Activity 2: Matching

- Ss work with the partners
Activity 3:

Transformation writing

From the modal letter Ss
write another letter, change
some underlined words if
necessary.

I. Vocabulary
photo (n): bức ảnh

gate (n): cổng
letter (n):bức thư
here (adv): đây, ở đây
there (adv): ở kia / đó

II. Read
1. T / F statements

a. The house is in the country. (T)
b. There is a river near the house. (F)

c. There are trees to the left of the house. (F)
d. There are two gardens near the house. (T)
2. Match the Qs with the correct answers.
a – D b – A c – E

d – B e – C

3. Write

Dear …,

Thanks for your letter. I’m in the country.
I live with my parents in a big house. There
is a flower garden in front of my house.
There is a vegetable garden behind the
house. There are tall trees near my house.
There is a stadium to the left of the house.
Here is a photo.

Love,
 Ba

IV. Summary

- Reading a letter describing a house to practice Voc about things around the house
and get to know form of a letter.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc, read the text A 2 P. 73 again carefully to get the details.
- Finish the exercise writing above again.

- Do the exercises A 5, 6 P. 67 – workbook.

A6 : ex: I live in a small house. There is a lake in front of the house…..
- Do the exercise B 1 P. 68

Bus (n): xe buýt bird (n): con chim car (n): xe hơi
dog (n): con chó sky (n): bầu trời

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

-Date of preparing: 28 / 12 / 09

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Lesson 4 :

B 1 – 4 P. 77

Period: 43

A. Objectives

- Integrated skills practice to describe where we live.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Poster, CD players

C. Methods: Hang man, Matching, Complete the table, Brain storming
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 03 / 12 / 09 Cường, Hồng

6B 01 / 12 / 09 Khoẻ, Hương

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)

Hangman:

MARKET (6) RICE/PADDY (4/5)
COUNTRY (7) POST / OFFICE (4/6)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(15p)

Step 2
While
reading

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Translation
Picture

Explaination
Untonym

Pictures checking
P. 76 – 77

Activity 1:
Matching

- Ss work individually
Activity 2: Listen
Complete the table

I. Vocabulary
apartment (n): căn hộ

clinic (n): phòng khám
noisy (a): ồn ào

quiet (a): yên tĩnh

II. Practice

1. Read and match the Qs with the Ans
a. Yes, he does. d. No, she doesn’t.
b. No, he doesn’t. e. No, there aren’t.
c. Yes, it is. f. Yes, it is.

2. Listen and complete the table
T reads:

a. Minh lives in an apartment in the city.
b. Tuan lives in a house in a town.

c. Nga lives in a house in the city.

Step 3
Post
reading

Name city town country apartment house

Minh   

Tuan  

Nga

Activity 3: Brain storming

- Ss write the differences between town and country

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

(5p) Stores, stadium, supermarket,

car, bus, noisy, apartment, shop,
museum, movie theater

small, lake, river, rice paddy,
tree, quiet, flower, garden

IV. Summary

- Integrated skills practice to describe where we live.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc, read the texts B 1 again

- Do the exercise

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 28 / 11 / 09

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Lesson 5 :

C 1 – 5 P. 78 – 81

Period: 44

A. Objectives

- Simple present “How” Qs and “by car / bike / bus…” to talk about transportation.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.
B. Teaching aids :

C. Methods:

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 04 / 12 / 09 Linh, Hoàng

6B 01 / 12 / 09 Bách, Nga

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Guessing game:

Ss choose a place in town (factory, museum, post office ….) and complete the strip.
Ex: A: Do you live near a …………?

B: No, I don’t.

C: Do you live near a …….?
B: Yes, I do.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Mime

Translation
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture

I. Vocabulary
walk (v): đi bộ, đi dạo

travel (v): đi lại, đi du lịch
plane (n): máy bay

bike (n): xe đạp
bus (n): xe buýt

train (n): tàu hoả, xe lửa



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Picture
Situation
Slap the board

Set the sence: Muốn 
biết bạn em đến 
trường bằng phương
tiện nào em xé hỏi 
bạn ntn?

- Bạn đến tường 
bằng pt gì?

Activity 1:

Substituation drill
- Ss practice
chorally with the
teacher.

Activity 2:
Picture drill

Activity 3:
- Ss practice in
closed pairs asking
and answering about
means of traveling
using the pictures/79

Activity 4: Listen
and read then
answer the Qs A4/
80

motorbike (n): xe gắn máy
on foot : (n): phương tiện đi bộ

II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về phương tiện đi lại
How do you go to school?

- I go to school by bike.

- I go to school on foot.

How do S go to school ?
does travel

- S + go(es) / travel(s) to school by + pt
on foot.

III. Practice
Ex: T: I go to school by bike.
Ss: repeat

T: bus

Ss: I go to school by bus.
T: Na

Ss Na goes to school by bus.

How do you go to school?
- I go to school by bike.

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

a. He gets up at 5: 30

b. He goes to school at 6: 30.
c. No, he doesn’t.

d. Yes, he does.

e. Classes start at 7: 00.
f. Classes end at 11: 30

IV. Summary

- Simple present “How” Qs and “by car / bike / bus…” to talk about transportation.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, practice asking and answering about means of traveling fluently.
- Do the exercises C 1 – 2 P. 70 – 71 work book.

C1: ex: a. goes C2: How does Mr.Ba go to school? – He walks.

Evaluation

……….

……….
……….
Date of preparing: 29 / 11 / 09

CONSOLIDATION

Period: 45

A. Objectives

- Voc + Gr in Unit 1 – Unit 4 (Greetings, At Home, At School, Big or Small), tobe,
personal Pronouns: I / You / He / She …..

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Voc & Gr to do the exercises
given to improve their skills in doing exercises and improve Ss’ skills in
communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.
B. Teaching aids : Poster, cards

C. Methods: Wordstorming, Multiple choice, Gap fill, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A Hằng, Khoẻ

6B Thi, Lâm

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
Wordstorming: - Ss work in goups of 3 - 4 student

teacher

desk
board

eraser couch



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-school

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

chair

table
house

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
task
(10p)

Step 2
While
task
(12p)

Step 3
Post
task
(8p)

Activity 1:
T reminds
Ss of Gr

Activity 2
Multiple
choice
- Ss work
individually

Activity 3
Gap - fill
- Ss do this
individually

Activity 4
- Read the
text &
answer the
Qs.

- Ss work

I. Grammar

1. Personal pronouns – Possessive Pr

I – My You – Your He – His She – Her
It – Its We – Our You – Your They – Their
2. Tobe

Am – I , Are – You / We / They , Is – He / She / It …
3. Cách chào hỏi, giới thiệu tên

What is your name ?

- My name is ………./ I am ………..

4. Cách hỏi / đáp về đồ vật.

What is this / that ? - This / That / It is a (an) ……..
What are these / those ? - These / Those ? They are …....

II. Practice
1. Which one is differrent?

a. chair table couch bench television
b. people mother sister brother father

c. come sit open desk close

d. father doctor driver teacher nurse

e. city big country street village

f. pen class pencil ruler eraser

g. fifteen fifty sixteen twenty old

h. book ruler stereo pencil board

2. Fill in the gaps with the correct forms of tobe

a. She a nurse.

b. I _________ Phong. This _________ my teacher.
c. He __________ a doctor.

d. There __________ 45 students in my class.
e. It ________ an eraser.

f. My sister and I ________students.

3. Read the passage and answer the questions.

His is Nam. He is twelve years old. There are three people
in his family. His father is Mr. Hai. He is forty-five. He is a
doctor. His mother is Mrs. Dung. She is forty. She is a
teacher.

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

with the
partners

b. How many people are there in his family?
c. What is his father’s name?

d. How old is his father?
e. What does his father do?
f. What is his mother’s name?
g. What does Mrs. Dung do?

IV. Summary

- Voc + Gr in Unit 1 – Unit 4 (Greetings, At Home, At School, Big or Small), tobe,
personal Pronouns: I / You / He / She …..

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc & Gr in Unit 1 – Unit 4 again.

- Do the exercises in these Units again in Workbook
- Prepare for next period – Revision (Unit 5 – Unit 7)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 29 / 11 / 09

CONSOLIDATION

Period: 46

A. Objectives

- Voc + Gr in Unit 5 – Unit 7 (Present simple tense, daily routine activities,
prepositions of place ….)

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Voc & Gr to do the exercises
given to improve their skills in doing exercises and improve Ss’ skills in
communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, Poster, cards

C. Methods: Network, Transformation writing, Mutiple choice, Actions game
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Network:

Places prepositions of place

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

-1. Pre task (8p)
- T reminds Ss of the Gr

I. Grammar
1. Present simple tense

- To talk about everyday actions,
routines.

- To describe school timetables.
2. Miêu tả về nơi mình sinh sống.
Ex: I live in a small house in the
country.

3. Cách hỏi đáp về phương tiện đi lại.
How do you go to school / travel to
work ?

- I go to school by walk.
- I travel to work by car.

2. While task (20p)

- Ss do the exercises individually.

* Multiple choice: Choose the best one to complete the sentences.

1. Is the garden beautiful?

a. Yes, it isn’t. b. Yes, it is. c. No, it is.
2. ……….there a lake in your garden?

a. Is b. Do c. Have

3. It is very ……..in the country.

a. full b. quiet c. noisy

4. Does Ba live in town? – No. He ………

a. live in the country. b. lives in the country c. lives at home
5.What are …………..? – They are houses.

a. that b. this c. those

6. What …………do you get up?

a. time b. o’clock c. for

7. Does he …………to the park ? – Yes, he goes to the park on foot.

a. travels b. ride c. walk

8. There is a house ………….the park.

a. in front b. next c. opposite

9. There are two bookstores ………the cinema.

a. to the right of b. to the left c. on

10. There is a movie theater …………..the factory and the restaurant.

a. in b. between c. on

11. …………..does your mother do ?

a. How b. Which c. What

12. …………brothers does she have?

a. How many b. Which c. What

13. Miss Nga ………….her breakfast in the factory.

a. plays b. has c. have

14. My father is a teacher. He ………in a prymary school.

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

15. They play soccer in a ………near their house.

a. stadium b. hospital c. restaurant

16. ……….Nga play volleyball?

a. Do b. Does c. Is

17. …………do you go to school?

a. What b. Where c. How

18. ………..Nam’s school big?

a. Is b. are c. am

19. What ………they do?

a. does b. are c. do

20. ……….are telephones.

a. These b. That c. This

* Gap – Fill: Complete the passage using “is / am / are”

1. This ……….Hoa’s family. There ………five people in her family. Her father
…... a doctor. He ……..forty five years old. Her mother ….. a nurse. She ………
forty. Her brothers ……….Nam and Phong. They ……..students.

2. I …….Lan. I ……… a student. My sister …… a student too. My father and
mother …………..teachers. They ……… forty. They …….. very happy.

* Transformation writing: Write the sentences using the words given.
Name / Hoa. I / get up / six o’clock. I / go to school / six thirty.

3. Post task (5p)

- T hepls Ss to correct the exercises above.

IV. Summary

- Voc + Gr in Unit 5 – Unit 7 (Present simple tense, daily routine activities,
prepositions of place ….)

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc and Gr in Unit 1 – Unit 7 to prepare for “the first semester test”
- Do the exercises in these Units again.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 30 / 11 / 09

THE FIRST SEMESTER TEST

Period: 47

A. Objectives

- Mainly in Modal verbs with “if”, “Could” with “wish”, Direct and reported speech,
adverb clauses of results, prepositions of time …

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr and Voc they’ve learnt to do
the exercises given.

- Improve listening, reading, writing skills.
B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, pens…

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

-C. Methods: Gap fill, multiple choice, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A, B

II. Revision / Warmer

- T checks Ss’ preparations

III. New lesson
Step 1: Pre testing (1p)

- T gives to Ss the testing papers.

- Ss check the exercises then ask the T if necessary.

Step 2: While testing (40p)

T monitors class. Ss do the exercises individually.

The contents of the test

- Chờ đề kiểm tra của Phòng GD & ĐT Hải Hà

Step 3: Post testing (2p)
- T collects the testing papers.

IV. Summary

- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done

V. Homework (2p)
- Review the Gr & Voc in Unit 1 – Unit 7.

- Do the exercises in the tét above again.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 30 / 11 / 09

CHỮA BÀI KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I

Period: 48

A. Objectives

- Mainly in Modal verbs with “if”, “Could” with “wish”, Direct and reported speech,
adverb clauses of results, prepositions of time …

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr and Voc they’ve learnt to do
the exercises given.

- Improve listening, reading, writing skills.
B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, pens…

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

- T checks Ss’ preparations

III. New lesson
Step 1: Pre task (10p)

- T gives comments about how well Ss’ve done.
- Gv nêu một số Hs đã làm tốt bài kiểm tra.
6A:

6B:

- Gv rút kinh nghiệm một số Hs chưa chú ý ôn tập tốt, kết quả kém.
6A:

6B:

Step 2: While task (40p)

- Gv đưa ra một số lỗi Hs mắc nhiều:
- Gv y/c Hs lên bảng làm lại các bài tập.
- Gv HD Hs chữa bài theo đáp án

Step 3: Post task (5p)

- Hs tự đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra của mình dựa trên biểu điểm đã cho.

IV. Summary

- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done.

- Hs tự đưa ra một số rút kinh nghiệm cho bản thân để học tốt hơn.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review the Gr & Voc in Unit 1 – Unit 7.

- Do the exercises in Unit 1- 7 – work book again.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

UNIT 8 :

OUT AND ABOUT

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Describe activities.

- Identify means of transportation.
- Describe on – going activities.

- Identify road signs.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

-Lesson 1 A 1 Present progressive tense with I , He, She to
talk about actions happening now.

P. 82
Lesson 2 A 1 Further practice in Present progressive positive

statements with I / You / She / He / We / They
to talk about actions happening now.

P. 82
Lesson 3 A 2 - 7 Present progressive “Wh” Qs with She / He /

They to talk about actions happening now.

P. 83 - 85
Lesson 4 B 1 Reading a picture story about a truck driver to

understand the main ideas and details.

P. 86 - 87
Lesson 5 C 1 - 2 Can / Can’t statements and traffic Voc to talk

about what you are allowed and not allowed to

do on the road.

P. 89 - 90
Lesson 6 C 3 - 4 Reading a text about Road Signs to understand

Must and Mustn’t for obligation / prohibition.

P. 90 - 91
Lesson 7 Grammar

practice

Further practice in simple present tense,
present progressive, prepositions of place,
question words, Can, Can’t, Must, Mustn’t

P. 92 - 95

Date of preparing: 01 / 12 / 09

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 3 P. 82 - 83

Period: 49

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use present progressive positive
statements with I / he / she to talk about what happening now.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Poster, CD player, picture cues

C. Methods: Picture drill, Rub out & remember, Noughts and Crosses
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 08 / 12 / 09 Mạnh, Lâm

6B 03 / 12 / 09 Thuỷ, Thương

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)

- T reminds Ss of tobe “I – am ; He / She – is ; You / We / They - are”

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Picture
Picture
Picture
Actions

I. Vocabulary

(to) play video games: chơi trò chơi
(to) ride a bike: đi xe đạp

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Production

(10p)

Rub out & remember

Activity 1:

Presentation text: A1 P. 82
top 3 pictures

Activity 2:Pictures drill

Ex:

1. What are you doing?
- I’m playing games.
2. What is he / she doing ?
- He / She is playing games.

Activity 3:

Noughts & crosses

Ex: I’m walking to school

Model sentences

I
He
She

‘m (am)
‘s ( is)

playing games
riding a bike
driving

- Ss work in 2 teams.

1. walk to school 4. drive a bus 7. play a game
2. travel by bus 5. go by plane 8. ride a motorbike
3. wait for a train 6. ride a bike 9. drive a car

IV. Summary

Present progressive tense with I , He, She to talk about actions happening now.

V. Homework (5p)

- Write 5 sentences about what you are doing & your partner doing
- Review Gr & Voc, practice speaking as above again fluenly. (A1-2)
- Do the exercises A 1- 2 P. 71 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 04 / 12 / 09

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Lesson 2 :

A 3 – 6 P. 84 – 86

Period: 50

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use present progressive “wh” questions
to talk about what happening now.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

-- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Poster, Textbook, CD players

C. Methods: Wordsquare, Picture drill, What & Where
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 09 / 12 / 09 Mai, Hà

6B 07 / 12 / 09 Thương, Tư

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Word square:

Ss find & circle the words, then put them in to a
present progressive statement, & write tem on the
BB

Ex: They’re going to school

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Eleciting Voc
Situation
Mime
Actions
Picture
Picture
Real life

What & Where

Presentation text: A1
P. 82 bottom 3 pictures
Activity 1:

Picture drill A3 P, 83
between T & Ss

Activity 2:

A4 P. 84 closed pair 
work drill

Activity 3:write it up
A6 P. 85 a,-c,

Activity 4: Write it up
- Do the exercies A 4
P. 73 work book.

I. Vocabulary
teach (v): dạy

write (v): viết
draw (v): vẽ
swim (v): bơi
run (v): chạy
learn (v): học tập

II. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về người nào đó đang làm gì.
What ‘s (is)are he/ shethey doing ?
1. Speak

Ex:

a, S1: What’s he doing?
S2: He’s...

b, S1: What are they doing?

S2: They’re...
2. Write

Ex: Nam is writing a letter.
Hoa is drawing a picture.

IV. Summary

- Further practice in Present progressive positive statements with I / You / She / He /
We / They to talk about actions happening now.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc & Gr in Present progressive tense.

- Write and learn by heart new words, learn by heart A5

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- Do the exercises A 3 – 4 / 73 – work book again in the note book.
- Do the exercises B 1 – 2 / 74 – work book in the note book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 05 / 12 / 09

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Lesson 3 :

B 1 P. 86 - 87

Period: 51

A. Objectives

- Reading a picture story about a truck driver to understand the main ideas and details
and Further practice in present progressive Wh-questions, positive statements.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Posters, CD players, picture

C. Methods: Matching, Ordering statements, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 10 / 12 / 09 Hằng, Cường

6B 08 / 12 / 09 Tùng, Trang

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
- Matching: Listen A 4 P.

- The heys: 1 – b 2 – f 3 – d 4 – a 5 – c 6 – e

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(8p)

Step 2
While
reading

(15p)

Eleciting Voc

Matching

- Ss guess the meanings
of words (phrases)
- T helps Ss to correct.
Activity 1:

Ordering

- Ss work with the
Partners

- Read the text B 1 P. 86
and check.

- The keys:

d – b – f – a – c – e
Activity 2:

I. Vocabulary

A truck driver Quầy bán thực phẩm

A farmer Người lái xe

A food stall Dỡ hàng xuống

(to) load Chất hàng lên

(to) unload Đến

(to) arrive Nông dân

II. Read
1. Order the actions
a. going to Ha Noi.

b. meeting the farmer.
c. having breakfast.
d. going to a farm.

e. loading vegetables in the truck.

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

-Step 3

Post
reading

(7p)

Comprehension Qs

- Ss work individually.

Activity 3:

Transformation writing

b. Where is he going to?
c. What is he doing?

f. unloading the vegetables.
2. Answer the Qs P. 87
a. He is a truck driver.

b. He is going to a farm.

c. The farmer is waiting for him.

d. He is taking vegetables to the market.
e. He is eating his breakfast.

f. He is eating at a food stall.

3. Write the Qs for these answers.

a. He is a truck driver.

b. He is going to a farm.
c. He is loading the truck.
Ex:

a. What does he do?

IV. Summary

- Reading a picture story about a truck driver to understand the main ideas and details
and Further practice in present progressive Wh-questions, positive statements.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc & Gr about Present progressive tense

- Read the text B 1 / 86, B 2 – 3 / 87 – 88 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises B 3 4 P. 74 work book.

B 3: Ex: a. gets

B 4: Viết câu để nói về bạn và bạn của bạn đang làm việc gì đó.
VD: I am listening to my teacher.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 07 / 12 / 09

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Lesson 4 :

C 1 – 2 P. 89 - 09

Period: 52

A. Objectives

- Can/ Can’t statements to talk about what you are allowed and not allowed to do
according to roads signs, Traffic Voc

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Lucky numbers, pictures, text book, CD players
C. Methods: Lucky numbers, picture cue drill, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

6B 10 / 12 / 09 Mạnh, Hậu

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)

Lucky numbers (Optional) – B 3 P. 87

a. Lucky number.

b. What are they doing at page 10?

c. What are the students doing at page 21 picture a?
d. What are they doing at page 37?

e. Lucky number.

f. What is he doing at page 51?
g. What are they doing at page 67?
h. What’s Hoang doing at page 80?
i. Lucky number.

j. What is he doing at page 87?

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(10)

Step 2
While
reading

(10p)

Step 3
Post

reading

(10p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Actions
Actions
Actions
Actions

- Actions game

One S acts, the others ask
and answer: (Ss may use all
the actions they know)
What is he / she doing?
- He / She is going straight.
Activity 1:

Comprehension Qs

a. What is his job?
b. Is his job difficult?

c. What does the sign mean?
- T introduces the Gr using
“can / can’t”

Activity 2: Picture drill / 89
Activity 3: Gap fill

- C 2 P. 89 - 90
- Gr Practice 7 P. 95

I. Vocabulary
a police man: chú công an
(to) park: đỗ xe

(to) go straight: đi thẳng
(to) turn left: rẽ trái
(to) turn right: rẽ phải
Can (đtkk): có thể

Can’t = Can not : khơng thể
II. Read

Đây là bài học nói về cơng việc của một 
chú công an giao thông và một số quy 
định về đường bộ. Let’s have a look.

a. He is a policeman.
b. Yes, it is.

c. It means “one way”.
III. Speak
* Grammar

S + can / can’t + V(inf) + O

….có thể / không thể …….
Ex: What does this sign mean?
- You can park here.

IV. Summary

- Can / Can’t statements and traffic Voc to talk about what you are allowed and not
allowed to do on the road.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Gr & Voc, read the text C 1 P. 89 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises C2 / 89 + Gr P 7/ 95 again, C 1 / 75 work book.

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

-C1 / 75: a. You can turn left.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 10 / 12 / 09

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Lesson 5 :

A

Period: 53

A. Objectives

- Reading a text about Road Signs to understand Must and Mustn’t for obligation /
prohibition.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids :
C. Methods: 
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 15 / 12 / 09 Nam, Khoẻ

6B 14 / 12 / 09 Phi, Nhuận

II. Revision / Warmer
III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(15p)

Step 2
While
reading

(20p)

Eleciting Voc
Expalaination
Expalaination
Picture

Expalaination
Expalaination
Expalaination
Situation
Activity 1:
- Wordsquare
Road sign,

accident, travel, left,
right, go fast
warn, dangerous,
turn, no, straight

I. Vocabulary
dangerous (a):

an accident : tai nạn
an intersection: giao lộ
(to) go fast : đi nhanh
(to) slow down: giảm tốc độ

(to) warn us: cảnh báo cho chúng ta

(to) help us: giúp đỡ chúng ta
II. Read

R O A D S I G N D

W K O R X H I S A

A C C I D E N T N

R U C D R L O R G

N R A E I P T A E

S T R A V E L I R

T U S L E F T G O

O R I G H T O H U

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

Step 3
Post
reading

(5p)

T / F Checking
- Ss work with the
partners.

- T helps Ss to

correct.

Activity 2:

- T presents the text
C 3 / 96

- Ss read C 3
Activity 3:
- Ss work
individually

1. T / F checking

a. slow down T e.park here F

go straight F Don’t park here T
b. turn left T f. cars & trucks go

here

T
Don’t turn left F motorbikes go here F
c. turn right g. go straight T
go straight / turn

left

Don’t go straight F
d. slow down F h. Park here T

Don’t go straight T Don’t park here F
* Grammar:

S + must / mustn’t + V(inf) + O
….phải / khơng được …….

Must (đtkk): phải (mang tính bắt buộc)
Mustn’t = Must not: mang nghĩa cấm đoán
2. Listen

1. c 3. a 5. g 7. f

2. d 4. h 6. b 8. e

T reads:

1. You mustn’t turn right here.
2. There’s a stop sign. I must stop.
3. You can park your car here.

4. You must slow down. There’s an intersection ahead.
5. You can enter that road. Look at the sign.

6. We can turn left here.
7. You can’t ride motorbike on this street.
8. You can’t park here.

IV. Summary

Reading a text about Road Signs to understand Must and Mustn’t for obligation /

prohibition.

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text C 3 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises C 2 – 4 / 75 – 75, Grammar Practice / 92 - 94

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing:

GRAMMAR PRACTICE

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

-Period: 54

A. Objectives

- Revising what students have learnt in Unit 7 - 8, doing practice exercises.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Posters, word cues

C. Methods: Bingo game, Gap fill, Chain game, Yes / No drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 17 / 12 / 09

6B 15 / 12 / 09

II. Revision / Warmer

- Verbs of traffic and transport - Playing ‘Bingo’

- Teacher reads: stop, ride a bike, wait, turn right, drive, load, go fast, travel, go
straight, turn left, park, unload, walk, slow down, take, warn

III. New lesson
1. Step 1: Presentation

1. Present progressive (all persons) – playing ‘Chain game’

S1: I’m watching T.V.

S2: He’s watching T.V and I’m playing video games.

S3: She’s watching T.V. He’s playing video games and I’m learning
English.

S4: You are watching T.V…etc.

2.Yes/no questions with present progressive - Pair work

S1: Are you playing soccer?
S2: Yes, I am.

S1: Is Nga reading a book?
S2: No, she isn’t.

3. Prepositions of place:

to the left/ right, opposite, in, in front of, between, behind, near, next to, on…

5. Can/ can’t statements to talk about what you are allowed and not allowed to do
according to road signs.

Example: You can turn right.

You can’t (cannot) turn left.

6. Question words: who, what, where, how, what time

Example Who’ that? - That (It) is Nga.

What does she do? - She’s a student.

Where is she going? - She’s going to school.
 How is she traveling? - She’s walking.

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

We must slow down.

Step 2: Practice

- Show the class how to do the exercises in their books and check the answers:
Ex1:

a. go – go b. travel – travels c. walk – don’t walk. Does…walk …? walks.
Ex2:

a. are waiting b. is watching c. are playing d. is listening
e. are walking f. Is traveling

Ex3: in / in front of/ behind/ opposite/ to the right of/ to the left of.
Ex4: a. where. b. who. c. what. d. what

Ex5:

a. play/ are playing c. go/ are going e. drives/ is driving
b. rides/ is riding d. walk/ am walking

Ex6:

a. must/ mustn’t b. must/ mustn’t/ mustn’t c. must/ mustn’t

Step 3: Further Practice:

- Ss practice speaking these task above again.

IV. Summary

- Revising what students have learnt in Unit 7 - 8

V. Homework

- Do reading quiz and test yourself in the workbook
- Do the exercises in Grammar practice again carefully.
- Review Voc and Gr in Unit 1 – 8 again carefully.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Unit 9 : the body

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Identify parts of the body.
- Physical descriptions of people.
- Identify and describe facial features.
- Describe surroundings.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 2 Nouns to talk about parts of the body P. 96 - 97
Lesson 2 A 3 - 5 Adjectives to describe physical appearance P. 97 - 98

Lesson 3 B 1 Face Voc (nouns and adjectives) to describe

faces.

P. 100
Lesson 4 B 2 - 3 Adjectives of colors to describe features P. 101

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

-Lesson 5 B 1
4 - 6

Further Practice in Body Voc to describe
people.

P. 102
Date of preparing: 31 / 12 / 09

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Lesson 1 :

A 1 P. 96 - 97

Period: 55

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to practise speaking fluently the
nouns to talk about parts of body.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : tape, pictures

C. Methods:

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 05 / 01 / 10 Ngọc, Linh

6B 04 / 01 / 10 Nhất, Quý

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
- Shark attack: body (4)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture

T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture
T’s body / picture

- Ss stand up and point the
parts of the body and sound
the names

Activity 1 :Picture drill

(A1/96)

Ss do like that in pairs.
Practice in pairs

Free practice.
Feet back.

Activity 2: Simon says

- Simon says touch your

I. Vocabulary
a head : đầu

a chest : ngực

a shoulder : vai
an arm : cánh tay
a hand : bàn tay
a leg : cẳng chân

a foot -> feet (pl N) : bàn chân
a finger: ngón tay

a toe : ngón chân

II. Pratice
What is this / that ?
- It’s ………..

What are these / those ?
- They are ……….

Example exchange: (A2)
S1: What’s that?

S2: That’s his (head).
S1: What are those?

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

head.

- Simon says touch your
chest.

- Simon says touch your
feet.

- Touch your shoulders!
- Simon says touch your
shoulders.

- Simon says touch your
legs.

- Touch your head!

- Touch your shoulders!

- Simon says touch your left hand.
- Simon says touch your fingers.
- Touch your left foot!

- Simon says touch your left toot.
- Simon says touch your right foot.
- Touch your head!

- Touch your toes!

- Simon says touch your toes.

IV. Summary

- Nouns to talk about parts of the body

V. Homework (5p)
- Review Voc &model sentences by heart.

- Make 5 -10 sentences like patterns.
- Work book: A.1 – P.83

-Prepare lesson 2 A.3 – 5 find out adj to discribe physical apperance.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 02 / 01 / 09

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Lesson 2 :

A 3 – 5 P. 97 - 98

Period: 56

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to get some more adjectives to
describe physical apperance.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Tape, pictures
C. Methods: Jumbled

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 07 / 01 / 09 Hân, Mạnh

6B 05 / 01 / 09 Cường, Hồng

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)

Jumble words :

Adeh = head sndha = hands mras = arms sote = toes

Shect = chest tefe = feet egsl = legs gifrens = fingers

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

-III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(12p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(3p)

Eleciting Voc
picture/ example
antonym

picture/ example
antonym

picture
actions

Mime for checking
Activity 1:

- Run through pictures or
cues in A.3 – P.97.

Activity 2:

T / F Repetition drill
He is tall.

short
thin

fat, slim, light, heavy,->
She, Lan

Activity 3:

Noughts& Crosses
- Ss work in 2 teams.
Activity 4:

Multiple choice
T reads:

1. She’s a short girl.
She’s fat.

2. He’s a fat man. He’s
tall. 3. He’s a short man.
He’s fat. 4. She’s a thin

woman. She’s tall.
Activity 5: Ss ask about
T’s picture then draw.

I. Vocabulary
tall (adj) : cao

short (adj): thấp
fat (adj): béo

thin (adj): gầy
heavy (adj): nặng

light (adj): nhẹ
strong (adj): khoẻ

weak (adj): yếu

a gymnast : vận động viên thể dục
weight lifter : vđv cử tạ

II. Grammar
Cách miêu tả hình dáng người
Ex: He is tall. She is fat.

III. Practice
* Speak

Ex: He is tall.
He is short.

He is thin.

He / tall She / small Lan / heavy
Nam / short They / thin I / strong

You / fat Mrs. Lien /
light

Country /
quiet
Ex: Mrs. Lien is light.

* Listen A 4 / 97

1. d 2. c 3. b 4. a

- T: This is Hoa, she is very tall, she is
thin.

IV. Summary

Adjectives to describe physical appearance

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice A 3 again, practice A 5 – 6 carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises A 3 – 4 / 84 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

……….
Date of preparing: 04 / 01 / 09

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Lesson 3 :

B 1 P. 100

Period: 57

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to get some more nouns and
adjectives about face-vocabulary and practice describing faces.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : tape , pictures

C. Methods: Bingo game, Wordcues drill, Write it up
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision

6A 08 / 01 / 09 Linh, Bách

6B 07 / 01 / 09 Thuỷ, Tuấn

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Bingo game: about parts of the body

T reads: Head, eyes, nose, shoulders, arms, feet, fingers, legs, hands, chest, hair, 
toes, mouth, teeth, ears

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia
picture/realia

picture/realia
Matching
Eleciting Gr:

Draw a face and ask:
Who’s this? Does
she/he have a round
face? an oval face? /
long hair?

Activity 1:
Word cue drill /

I. Vocabulary
eye (n): mắt

ear (n): tai
lip (n): môi

a tooth -> teeth (n): răng
hair (un N): tóc

nose (n): mũi
mouth (n): mồm
full (Adj): đầy đặn
round (Adj): tròn
oval (Adj): trái xoan

II. Grammar

Cách miêu tả về đặc điểm khuôn mặt
Ex: He has a round face. He has short hair

She / He + has (a/an) + adj + N.
I /You /We/ They + have

She has = She’s I have = I’ve

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

-Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Picture drill ( from a
to f- P.100)

a. He / a round face
b. She / an oval face
c. She / full lips
d. He / thin lips
e. She / long hair
f. He / short hair
Activity 2:

Wordsquare

- Ss work in groups of

4 – 5 to find the words.

Example exchange:
He has a round face.
She has an oval face.

H A I R X F

N E F A T I
E O Y F E N
A B S E E G
R T H E T E
M O U T H R
H E A V Y S

 hair, air, fat, see, the,

mouth,out, heavy.

ear, arm, near, toe, feet, teeth,
fingers.

nose, eye.

IV. Summary

- Face Voc (nouns and adjectives) to describe faces.

V. Homework

- Learn vocabulary & patterns by heart
- Make up 5 – 10 sentences.

- Work book: B.1, 2 P.85
- Prepare lesson 4 - B.2,3

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 08 / 01 / 10

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Lesson 4 :

B 2 – 3 P. 101

Period: 58

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to get more adjectives of color to
describe features.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : tape, pictures,realia things

C. Methods: Jumbled words, Wordcues drill, Write it up, Real object drill
D. Contents

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 12 / 01 / 10 Nga, Thi

6B 11 / 01 / 10 Kiên, Trung

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)

- Jumbled words:

Yees = eyes, cefa = face, sone = nose hari = hair
Spli = lips dreshouls = shoulders, rea =ear
- Ss work individually

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Real object
Real object

Real object
Real object
Real object
Real object
Real object
Real object
Real object
Real object
Real object

Real life drill

Activity 1: T uses 1 pen and
ask about its color.

- Real things drill
Ex: What color is it?
- It is blue.

T: Muốn biết về màu tóc của 
cơ ấy ta phải hỏi ntn?

- T helps Ss to give the form
Activity 2: Word cues drill

Her eyes / blue
His eyes / brown
Her eyes / green
Her hair / black
His hair / dark brown

Your bike / green
Lan’ bag / pink
Activity 3:

- Ss ask about the color of
their friend’s things

- Activity 4: Write it up

I. Vocabulary
color (adj): màu sắc

black (adj, n): màu đen, đen
white (adj, n): trắng, màu trắng
brown (adj, n): nâu, màu nâu
blue (adj, n): xanh, màu xanh
red (adj, n): đỏ, màu đỏ
grey (BE) = gray (AE) (adj)
green (adj, n): xanh lá cây

yellow (adj, n) : vàng, màu vàng
orange (adj, n) : cam, màu cam
purple (adj, n) : tím, màu tím

II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về màu sắc

What color is it ?
What color + to be + S ?

- S + tobe + Adj (màu sắc).
Cách hỏi đáp về màu tóc / mắt.
Ex: What color is her hair ?
- It is black.

What color is her hair ?
are his eyes ?

It is black.

yellow.

They are

III. Practice
Ex: What color are her eyes ?
- They are blue.

* Make Qs from the answers.

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

-Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

1. What color is Mai’s hair?
2. What color are Quang’s 
eyes?

3. What color is your school?
4. What color is her school 
bag?

1. Mai’s hair is black.

2. Quang’s eyes are dark brown.
3. My school is green.

4. Her school bag is blue.

IV. Summary (1p)
- Adjectives of colors to describe features

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice speaking about colors again carefully and fluently.
- Finish the exerices Write it up above in the note book.

- Do the exercises B 3 / 86 work book.

- Prepare for next period B 4 – 6 / 101 – 102

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 11 / 01 / 10

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Lesson 5 :

B 4 – 6 P. 101 - 102

Period: 59

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to get more further practice in body
vocabulary to describe people.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, posters, picture
C. Methods:

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 14 / 01 / 10 Mai, Linh

6B 15 / 01 / 10 Hân, Mạnh

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
Matching.

* B.5 (P.102) : Ss listen and write the number next to the correct pictures.

Nb : Do not use the tapescrip in the teachers’ book ( P.96 the text for “b” and “d”
is wrong. It is different from tape scrip)

Teacher reads:

1. He has an oval face and thin lips.
2. He has a round face.

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

4. Her hair isn’t long and isn’t short. She has full lips.
Answer key : 1a, 2c, 3b, 4d.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading
(5p)

Step 2
While
reading

(15p)

Step 3
Post
reading

(10p)

Net work

- T reminds Ss of Voc
- Ss work in groups of
3 – 4

Activity 1:

* Open Prediction
- Ss listen and read the
text silently and check
their prediction.

- Ask Ss to read again and
give answer key.

Activity 2:

Comprehension Qs
(P.102)

Activity 3:

Transformation writing
- Miss Lan is tall and thin.
She has an oval face. She 
has brown eyes. She has 
short black hair. She has 
a long small nose. She has

white teeth. She is strong. 
She is a gymnast.

I. Vocabulary

II. Practice

1.B.4 . P.101 ( picture only)

Miss Chi is ....(1)....and thin . She has
a ..(2)... face, ..(3).. black hair ,..(4).. eyes, a..
(5)...nose,..(6)... lips and small ..(7)..teeth.
- Read

Key : 1: tall ; 2: round , 3 : long , 4 : brown ,
5 : small, 6: thin, 7 : white

2. Answer the Qs
a. It’s long

b. It’s black
c. They’re brown
d. It’s small.
e. They’re full.

3. Write a passage using the words given
Miss Lan / tall / thin. She / an oval face.

She / brown eyes. She / short black hair.
She / long / small nose. She / white teeth.
She / strong. She / a gymnast.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Further Practice in Body Voc to describe people.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc, read the text again carefully, Practice B 6 / 102
- Finish the exercise Writing above in the note book.

- Do the exercise B 4 – 5 P. 86 work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Unit 10 : STAYING HEALTHY

I. Objectives



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



-Body
Head
Hair

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Helping Ss to:

- Talk about feelings.

- Talk about wants and needs.
- Express possession.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 – 2,
A 5

Talking about how we feel using adjectives of
Physical State.

P. 104 -
106
Lesson 2 A 3 - 4 Reading a dialogue to recognise Polite Offers

and Requests with “What would you like ?”
and “I’d like some ……/ a / an …..”.

P. 105 –
106
Lesson 3 B 4 - 5 Uncountable and plural Food and Drink nouns,

Polite Requests “I’d like some …….” And
polite Offers “What would you like?”.

P. 110 -
111
Lesson 4 B 1 - 3 Some / any with “There is / are …”, positive,

negative and Y / N Qs to talk about Food and
Drink.

P. 108 -
109
Lesson 5 B 1 - 5 Speaking about Favorite Food and Drink to

contrast “Would you like …?” with “Do you
like …?”.

P. 112 -
113
Date of preparing: 11 / 01 / 10

UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY

Lesson 1 :

A1 – 2, 5 P. 104 - 106

Period: 60

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to to practice talking about how we
feel using adjective of physical state.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, word cues

C. Methods: Picture / Wordcue drill, Guessing game, Rub out and Remember
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 15 / 01 / 10 Hằng, Kiên

6B 14 / 01 / 10 Thương, L. Đức

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Talk about colors of the objects in the classrom.

Ex: What color ist this / that ?
- Its is ……….

III. New lesson

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

Presentation
(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Picture
Untonym
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Mime

Explaination

Rub out and remember
Set the sence:

Muốn biết trạng thái của 
bạn mình em sẽ hỏi bạn e 
ntn bằng TV?

Activity 1: Wordcue drill
Ex: How do you feel?
- I am hot.

Activity 2:

Picture drill / P. 104
Activity 3: Matching
T reads:

Nhan is hungry. He’d like
noodles.

Phuong is thirsty. She’d
like a drink.

Ba is full.
Huong is cold.

Activity 4: Guessing game
Ss complete the sentence

hungry (adj): đói
full (adj): no

thirsty (adj) khát
hot (adj): nóng

cold (adj) : lạnh
tired (adj) mệt mỏi
feel (v): cảm thấy

II. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về cảm giác, trạng thái

How do you fell?
does she

- I am hot. – She is hungry.
How + do / does + S + feel ?
- S + am / is / are + Adj (trạng thái).

III. Practice
1. Speak

Ex: How does he feel ?
- He is hungry.
2. Listen A 5 / 106
Phuong – b

Nhan – a
Ba – f
Huong – d
* Speak

Ex: Are you hot ?
- No, I’m not.
Are you hungry ?

IV. Summary (1p)

- Talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical State.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, Practice A 1- 2 fluently.

- Do the exercises A 1 / 87 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 15 / 01 / 10

UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY

Lesson 2 :

A 3 – 4 P. 105 - 106

Period: 61

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to practice reading a dialogue to recognize
the polite offers and the requests with “what would you like? “ and

“ Would you like ...?”

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, poster, pictures

C. Methods: Gap fill, What & where, Mapped dialogue, Matching
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 19 / 01 / 10 Thi, Thanh

6B 18 / 01 / 10 Huyền, Phong

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Chatting: Asking and answering with classmates .

Ex: S1: How do you feel?
S2: I’m ( hungry).

S3: How does he / she feel?
S1: He / She is (hungry)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(10p)

Step 2
While
reading

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Picture
Situations
Examples
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
What & where
Predict dialogue:
Activity 1: Gap - fill

- Ss guess the information
then fill in the gaps.

- T explains :

What about you ?

- Read the dia logue the
check the predictions.
Key:

1. hot , 2. thirsty, 3. like, 
4. orange juice , 5. hungry
6. some 7. noodles 8. like 9.
wouldn’t 10. tired

Activity 2: Matching

I. Vocabulary
want (v): muốn,

orange juice (n): nước cam
noodles (n): phở, mỳ

drink (n) : đồ uống

some (dùng trong câu khẳng định): 1 chút
like (v) : thích

would like = ‘d like : muốn
II. Read

* Fill in the blanks
Nam: How do you feel?

Lan: I’m ....(1).... and ...(2).... .
Nam: What would you like?
Lan: I’d ...(3)... some ..(4)... .
What about you?

Nam: I’m ...(5)... I’d like ...(6).. ...(7)....
Lan: Would you ...(8)... noodles,Ba?
Nam: No, I..(9)... . I’m ...(10)...
* Match the words with the names.

Words Lan Nam Ba

hot 

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

Step 3
Post
reading

(8p)

- Ss work individually
Keys: Ba: tired, to sit down
Nam: hungry, noodles
Lan: hot, thirsty, orange
juice

Activity 3: Eleciting Gr
- T explains using the
dialogue A 3 / 105

Mapped dialogue
A: How do you feel?
B: I’m cold and hungry.
A: What would you like?
B: I’d like some noodles.
How do you feel?
A: I’m thirsty.

B:What would you like?
A: I’d like some orange
juice.

full
hungry
noodles
A drink
To sit down
* Grammar

Would like: được dùng để đưa ra lời mời,
hỏi ai muốn điều gì cách lịch sự

What would + S + like?
 = What do/does + S + want?
 S+’d like + N / to V…

Dùng diễn tả lời mời cách lịch sự
Would you like + N / to V….?
Yes, please / No, thank you.
* Practice the dialogue

……feel ? …cold + hungry.
……like ? …some noodles. …

feel?
….. thirsty …..like ?
orange juice.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Polite Offers and Requests with “What would you like ?” and “I’d like some ……/
a / an …..”.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, practice A 3 / 105 fluently again.
- Do the exercises A 2, 3, 4 P. 87 – 88 work book.

A 3: Điền từ vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành hội thoại sau đó viết 1 hội thoại tương tự
về bạn Nam và Ba.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 16 / 01 / 10

UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY

Lesson 3 :

B 4 – 5 P. 110 - 111

Period: 62

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to practice speaking reading uncountable
about food and drink, a polite reqests: I’d like some...

And polite offers : What would you like?

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

-- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, picture, text book

C. Methods: Explaination, Matching, Picture drill, Slap the board
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 21 / 01 / 10 Hiếu, Quang

6B 19 / 01 / 10 Phúc, Thêm

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Chatting: Ask and answer :

How do you feel? - I am ……
What would you like? - I’d like ……

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Explaination

Slap the board

Activity 1:

- T explains countable and
uncountable nouns.

Ss give some examples in
countables and uncountable
nouns.

Activity 2: Listen and repeat

- Ss read the dialogue again
and find the quatifiers are
used in the dialogue.
- T explains

Activity 3: Matching

- Ss Listen and match the
names with the pictures.
T reads: Nhan would like
some chicken and some rice.
Tuan would like some meat
and some vegetables.

Huong would like some fruit
and some milk.

Mai would like some fish and

I. Vocabulary
menu (n): thực đơn
chicken (n): gà, thịt gà
fish (n): cá

milk (n): sữa

bread (n): bánh mỳ
beef (n): thịt bò

II. Grammar

+ Những danh từ không đếm được
luôn luôn ở số ít và không được dùng
với a / an, chúng thường được dùng
với some / any/ no / a little…

+ Tuy nhiên 1 số DT khơng đếm

được có thể Được dùng với ý nghĩa
đặc biệt và chúng đếm được thì ta coa
thể dùng với a / an.

VD: a fish: một con cá
A hair: một sợi tóc

An orange juice: một cốc (chai, lon ..)
chỉ số nước cam theo đơn vị bán.
1. Listen

Nhan c, f Tuan a, d
Huong e, g Mai b, h

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

an orange juice.

* Ss listen to the teacher
again then find more about
the uses of “would like”.
GV hướng dẫm HS thêm về
cách dùng.

Activity 4: Picture drill
B 4 + 5 P. 111

Activity 5: roles play
HS luyện tập giống phần
picture drill, nhưng đóng vai
khách hàng và bồi bàn

- Dùng trong lời yêu cầu:
Ex: I would like some fish.

- Dùng trong lời mời:
* What would you like?
* Would you like some fish ?
- Yes, I’d live to.

- No, thanks.
2. Speak

Ex: 1. What would you like?
- I’d like some …..
2. Would you like some ….?
- Yes, I’d love to.

- No, thanks.
* Sir: ngài, quí ngài
* Madam: quí bà

IV. Summary (1p)

- Practice speaking reading uncountable about food and drink, a polite reqests: I’d
like some...

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, practice neư Gr fluently again.
- Do the exercises A 1 – 4 / 90 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 18 / 01 / 10

UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY

Lesson 4 :

B 1 + C 1 – 5 P. 108 - 113

Period: 63

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use “Would you like …..?”, contrast with
“Do you like …?” to talk about food and drinks.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, picture, cards

C. Methods: Guessing game, Picture drll, Rub out & Remember dialogue, Survey
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 22 / 01 / 10 V. Anh, Cường

6B 21 / 01 / 10 Quân, Hằng

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

-II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Guessing game

- Ss complete the sentence: “I’d like some / a / an………”
S1: Would you like an orange?

S2: No, I wouldn’t.

S3: Would you like some fish?

S2: Yes, I would.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture

- Slap the board

Activity 1: Picture drill

- Ss work in pairs

Activity 2: Rub out & 
Remember dialogue

C 2 / 112

(Gv xoá những phần in
thường)

Activity 3: Picture drill

B1 + C1

Ex: Do you like apple?
- Yes, I do.

- No, I don’t.

Survey

- Ss go around the class
then ask the others:
“Do you like ………….”

I. Vocabulary

My favorite food / drink: đồ ăn / uống
ưa thích

carrot (n): cà rốt
bean (n): đậu, đỗ
pea (n): hạt đậu
an apple : táo
an orange : cam

II. Practice
* B 1 + C 1 / 112

Ex: A: What is this?
What are these ?

B: It is / They are …………
III. Grammar

* Cách hỏi / đáp về đồ ăn, uống ưa thích
A: What’s your favorite food?

B: I like meat.

A: Do you like fish?
B: Yes, I do.

A: Do you like tomato?
B: No, I don’t. I like potato.
Eg: Do you like chicken?
* Survey

Names like doesn’t like
Nam Orange juice fish

Thuy

IV. Summary (1p)

“Do you like …? / What is your favorite food / drink ?” to talk about food and
drinks.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice C 2 fluently again.

- Write 5 sentences about friends like: “Nam likes orange juice but he doesn’t like
fish.”

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 22 / 01 / 10

UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY

Lesson 5 :

B 2 – 3 + C3 P. 111, 113

Period: 64

A. Objectives

- Some / any with “There is / are …”, positive, negative and Y / N Qs to talk about
Food and Drink.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures,wordcues

C. Methods: Network, What & Where, Dictation list, wordcues drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 25 / 01 / 10 Cảnh, Chiến

6B 26 / 01 / 10 Bách, Chung

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Network: Ss work in groups of 5 – 6

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(8p)

Step 2
Practice

(20p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture

Picture

What & Where

- T explains the Gr (the
uses of a / an )

Activity 1: Dictation list

T reads: rice, water,
banana, milk, vegetables,

I. Vocabulary
water (n): nước

a cold drink: nước lạnh
a hot drink: nước nóng
lemonade (n): nước chanh

iced tea / coffee : trà đá / cà phê đá
soda (n): nước ngọt

II. Grammar

- Mạo từ “a / an” : một, được đặt trước
một N k xác định, đếm được số ít. “an”
đứng trước những N bắt đầu bằng một
nguyên âm (A O I E U), “a” đứng trước
những N bắt đầu bằng một phụ âm.

a an some

banana apple rice, water,



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



104

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

apple, meat, orange,
noodles, hot drink, bread,
cold drink, beans, carrots,
- Ss listen then write the
words in the table.

Activity 2: Presenting the
dialogue B2 / 59

- Ss read then find the
uses of “some / any”
? Some và any dùng với
N đếm đc hay k đếm đc?
? Some / any dùng với
dạng câu nào?

T explains the uses of
“some / any”

Activity 3:

Word cue drill B.3 / 109
- Using the words in B1-
P.108

- Ss practice in pairs.
- Free practice

- Feed back

hot drink
cold drink

orange milk, meat,

vegetables
noodles
beans, bread

* “some / any”: vài, một vài, một chút

Ex: some apples, some milk

- Some / any được dùng với danh từ đếm
được và không đếm được

+ Some: dùng với câu khẳng định và
trong lời mời.

Ex: Would you like some rice?

+ Any: Dùng với câu nghi vấn và phủ
định.

Ex: Is there any milk here?
- No, there isn’t any milk.

meat (v) oranges (x) vegetables(v)
soda (v) bananas (v) rice (v)
water (x) apples(x) cabages (v)
Example exchange:

a. Are there any apples?

Yes. There are some apples.
b. Is there any meat?

No. There isn’t any meat.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Some / any with “There is / are …”, positive, negative and Y / N Qs to talk about
Food and Drink.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice B 2 – 3 carefully and fluently.
- Finish the exercises B 1 – 5, C 1 – 5 work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Unit 11 : what do you eat ?

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- buy food and drink using English.
- Talk about quantifiers and prices.
- Express needs and wants.

II. Teaching aids

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

Lesson 1 A 1 Quantifiers (a kilo of ….) and containers (a
bottle of ….) to talk about things people buy at
the store.

P. 114 -
115
Lesson 2 A 2 - 4 Listening for specific information about

quantifiers for shopping.

P. 116 –

117
Lesson 3 A 2 “How much ….?” And “How many …” with

“want” and “need” to talk about quantifiers
for shopping.

P. 110 -
111
Lesson 4 B 1,

B 3 - 4

Further practice in offers and requests for Food
and drink using “some / an / a”.

P. 119 -
120
Lesson 5 B 5 - 6 Talking about prices for Food and Drink with

“How much is it?”

P. 120
Lesson 6 Grammar

Practice

Further practice in Likes and Dislikes (Simple
Present tense), countability, Adjectives, Qs
words, Present progressive, Quantifiers.

P. 122 -
123
Date of preparing: 23 / 01 / 10

UNIT 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT ?

Lesson 1 :

A 1 P. 114 - 115

Period: 65

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use quantities (a kilo of / a gram of ...)
and containers (a bottle of / a box of ..) to talk about the price people buy at the store.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures, poster

C. Methods: Network, Picture drill, Matching, Roles play
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 28 / 01 / 10 P. Trang, Thi

6B 26 / 01 / 10 Thêm, D. Thương

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Net words:

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Picture
Picture
Situation
Picture

I. Vocabulary
bottle (n): chai, lọ

cooking oil (n): dầu ăn
packet (n): gói

tea (n): trà, nước trà
chocolate (n): sơ cơ la



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



106

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

Step 2

Practice

(18p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Picture
Explaination
Situation
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture

- Picture drill A 1b / 115
Ex: What is this?

- It’s a bottle of cooking oil.
T -> Ss => S - S

Activity 1: Present the
dialogue A1/ 114

Where is it ? Who is he / she?

What are they doing?

What are they talking about? 
Can you guess which

sentence does a store keeper 
say? And what does Mrs Vui 
respond?

Activity 2: Picture cue drill
A 1a-b / 114 - 115

Activity 3: Matching:

kilo (n): kilo

gram (n): gram, lạng
dozen (n): tá

egg (n): trứng
can (n): lon, hộp
bar (n): thỏi, bánh

soap (n): xà bơng/phịng
tube (n): ống tp

toothpaste (n): kem đánh răng
II. Practice
1. Listen and read A 1 / 114
Store keeper: Can I help you?

Vui: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil,
please.

Store keeper: Here you are.
Vui: Thank you.
Example exchange:

A: Can I help you ?

B: Yes, a packet of tea please?
A: Here you are.

B: Thank you.

A B

a. a bottle of
b. a can of
c. a bar of
d. a dozen
e. a kilo of
f. a tube of

1. beef
2. eggs
3. milk
4. soda
5. soap
6. toothpaste

IV. Summary (1p)

Quantifiers (a kilo of ….) and containers (a bottle of ….) to talk about things people
buy at the store.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc, practice A 1 fluently again.

- Do the exercises A 1, 2, 3 / 94 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 25 / 01 / 10

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

Lesson 2 :

A2 P. 116

Period: 66

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to practise listening for specific
information about quantities for food shopping.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, cards, pictures

C. Methods: Pelmanism, Gap fill,

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 29 / 01 / 10 Đức, Tr. Hồng

6B 28 / 01 / 10 Hương, Nhất

II. Revision / Warmer (8p)
Pelmanism: Ss find words with picture or word.

Words: grams of ... a kilo of ... a bar of ... a can of ... a box of ...
a tube of ... a packet of ... a bottle of ... a dozen ....

Pictures: peas camay beef rice

eggs toothpaste tea chocolates cooking oil

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(7p)

Step 2

Practice

(20p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination

Rub out & remember
Activity 1: Gap fill

- Ss work with the
partners, guess the
information then fill in
the blanks.

- Feedback
Activity 2:

- Ss listen and read then
correct their guessing.

Comprehension Qs
- Ss answer the Qs with
the partners

I. Vocabulary

want (v): muốn

need (v): cần

much (a): nhiều (dùng với N k đếm đc)
many (a): nhiều (dùng với N đếm được)
How much ... / How many… ? bao nhiêu

II. Practice
1. Fill in the blanks

Sale girl: Can I help you?

Ba: Yes,I’d …… some beef, please.
Sale girl: How ……. do you …….?
Ba: Two hundred ………. , please.
Sale girl: Is ……. anything else?
Ba: Yes, I need ……… eggs.

Sale girl: How …..….. do you …..…?
Ba: A dozen, ………

2. Grammar

How much + N (uncountable) ……?
How many + N (countable) …….?

=> We use them to talk about quantifiers.
3. Answer the Qs A 2 / 116

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

-Step 3
Further
Practice

Activity 3: Board drill

a. At the store.

b. He wants some beef and some eggs.
c. He wants two hundred gram beef.
d. He wants a dozen.

Example exchange:
S1: I need some beef.

S2: How much beef do you want?
S1: Half a kilo, please

S2: I need some oranges.

S1: How many oranges do you need?
S2: Half a dozen , please.

(5p)

IV. Summary (1p)

- “How much ….?” And “How many …” with “want” and “need” to talk about
quantifiers for shopping.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, Practice A 2 /116 again carfully and fluently.
- Do the exercises A 4 – 5 / 94 work book.

A5: Đóng vai người khách hàng, hồn thành đoạn hội thoại.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 30 / 01 / 10

UNIT 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT ?

Lesson 3 :

A 4 - 5

Period: 67

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for specific information about
quantities for food shopping, practise “How much…?” and “How many…?” with
“want” and “need” to talk about quantities for shopping.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Powerpoint lesson (pictures, CD player, textbook)

C. Methods: Matching, Guessing, Complete the table, Mapped dialogue
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

Items Quanlity

Beef Half a kilo

Rice 2 kilos

Milk Two bottles

Oranges Half a dozen

Beans 500grams

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

6A
6B

II. Revision / Warmer (10p)
Matching: Match halves words to make meaningful words
Ex:

+

= POTATOES

eggs bananas carrots fish meat

chicken apples Cooking oil milk bread

- Ss work in groups of 3 - 4

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(3p)

Step 2
Practice

(22p)

Step 3
Further

Eleciting Voc
Pictures
Explaination

Activity 1: Matching

Ss listen to the CD then match
the names of the people with
the things they want.

T reads: Phuong wants a tube

of toothpaste. Mai wants a 
can of soda. Ly wants a bar of
soap and a box of chocolates. 
Nam wants a packet of

cookies.

Let some of the SS answer and

ask the whole class to listen
again and check their answers.
- Check the Ss’ answers,
correct if there are any
mistakes.

Activity 2: Open pre-reading

- Ss work with the partners
then guess the things Nam’s
mom needs and the quantify.
Activity 3: Complete the 
table

- Ss read the dialogue A4/ 117
then correct their mistakes.
Activity 4: Mapped dialogue

M: Can you go to the store for
me?

I. Vocabulary
cookie (n): bánh quy

a packet of cookies: 1 gói bánh quy
II. Practice

1. Listen. A 3 / 117
The keys:

Phuong: d
Ly: e, a
Mai: b
Nam: c

2. Read A 4 / 117

Things Amounts
1. cooking oil a bottle
2. rice 2 kilos
3. beef half a kilo
4. oranges a dozen

Can you…..store
for me?

Yes, …What
…….need?
A bottle ……oil 7.50



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



110

-POTA
A

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Practice
(8p)

N: Yes, mom. What do you
need?

M: A bottle of cooking oil and
some rice.

N: How much rice do you
want?

M: Two kilos.

and ….rice.
Do we …

Literature …8.40?

How …..rice
……want?
Two kilos.

IV. Summary (1p)

“How much ….?”, “How many …” with “want / need” to talk about quantifiers for

shopping.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr in Food and Drink topics.

- Do the exercises A1 – 5/ 93 – 94 work book .

- Practice A4/ 117 again fluently again. Prepare for next period (B1, 3 - 4)

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 01 / 02 / 10

UNIT 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT ?

Lesson 4 :

B 1 - 4 P. 119 - 120

Period: 68

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to practise speaking the further
practice in offers and requests for food and drink using“some,a. an ”

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures, wordcues

C. Methods: Kim’s game, Checking items, Ordering, Wordcues drill, Chain game
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Kim’s game:

T uses the pictures B1 / 119
- Ss work in 2 teams

The keys: rice, noodles, beef (meat), chicken, fish, vegetables, oranges, bananas,
oranges juice, milk, soda, water.

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

Step 1
Presentation

(5p)

Step 2
Practice

(20p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Situation
Situation

Rub out & remember
Activity 1:

Checking the items

Ss work individually listen
then check the items.

- T asks some Ss to come to
the board and write their
answers.

- Ss listen again then correct
the answers

Activity 2: Ordering

- Ss listen and order the
items above.

Activity 3: Wordcues drill

Example exchange:

A: What would you like for
lunch?

B: I’d like some bread and
some milk.

Activity 4: Chain game
- Ss work in groups of 3

I. Vocabulary
lunch (n): bữa trưa

dinner (n): bữa tối

II. Practice
1. Listen

a. Check the letter of each picture.
B1/119

The keys: b, c, e, f, h, i, l

b. Order the letters as you hear
Keys:

1. e 2. b 3. i 4. c

5. f 6. j 7. h 8. l

2. Speaking

What would you like for lunch?

- I’d like some beef and some noodles

S1: I’d like some bread.

S2: I’d like some bread and some eggs.

S3: I’d like some bread, some eggs and

a banana.

IV. Summary (1p)

Further practice in offers and requests for Food and drink using “some / an / a”.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr in Food & Drink Voc.

- Do the exercises B1, 4 / 95 – 96 work book.
- Review number Voc, “How much …” Qs.

Evaluation

……….

……….
……….
Date of preparing: 01 / 02 / 10



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



112

-eggs / orange juice

meat / soda chicken / rice

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

UNIT 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT ?

Lesson 5 :

B 5 – 6 P. 120 - 121

Period: 69

A. Objectives

- Talking about prices for Food and Drink with “How much is it?”
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures, poster
C. Methods: Bingo game, Picture drill, Servey
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 05 / 02 / 10 Huong, Nga

6B 03 / 02 / 10 Hoa, Mai

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Bingo game: Ss look at the pictures B1 / 119 and write down 4 names of food /
drink they like.

Listen to the teacher then tick the same things.

T reads: soda, water, bananas, rice, orange juice, meat, oranges, noodles, fish, milk, 
vegetables, chicken.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Explaination
Picture

Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Explaination

What & Where

Set the sence:

Muốn biết giá tiền 1 cái
bút e sẽ hỏi ntn?

Giá tiền 2 cái bút?

Bao nhiêu tiền 1 cái bút?

- Ss find the form with
teacher’s help.

Activity 1: Picture drill

- Ss work in pairs

I. Vocabulary
A hundred : 100

A thousand : 1.000

sandwich (n): bánh xăng quých
glass (n): cốc, ly

bowl (n): bát, tô, chậu
cake (n): bánh ngọt
lemon (n): chanh

lemon juice (n): nước chanh
ice _ cream (n): cà rem, kem
fried - rice (n): cơm chiên

II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về giá cả:

How much is a pens?
- It’s 1000 dong.

How much are two pens?
- They are 2000 dong.

How much + is / are + S ?
- S + is / are + giá tiền.

III. Practice
B 5 P. 121

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Activity 2: Servey

T: I have one table here.
You’ll have to ask your
partners abput the prices
then fill in the table.

How much is a fried - rice?
- It is 2.500d.

Things How much ….?

A bowl of noodles
A can of coca
A pen

A pencil
TA 6 book

A tube of toothpaste

10.000d

IV. Summary (1p)

Talking about prices for Food and Drink with “How much is it?”

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice speaking about prices fluently.

- Do the exercises Grammar Practice P. 122 – 123, B 2, 3, 4 / 95 – 96 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 16 / 02 / 10

GRAMMAR PRACTICE

Period: 70

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practise speaking further practice in
likes and dislikes (simple present tense, countability, adjectives…..)

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, poster, cards

C. Methods: Find S.O who, What & Where, Gap fill, Brainstorming
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 19 / 02 / 10 Tr. Tú, P. Trang

6B 22 / 02 / 10 Tư, Trịnh

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Find someone who (likes and dislikes)

Find someone who... Name
like fish

doesn’t like chicken
likes bread

doesn’t like noodles

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

-III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Explaination
Mime

Real objects
Untonym >< late

Activity 1: What & Where

Activity 2: T reminds Ss of
the Present Simple tense.

Activity 3: Gap fill

- Ss work with the partners.

Read carefully then to fill in
the blanks with the suitable
Adjectives.

Activity 4: T explains how to

use “a”, “an”, “some” and
“any”.

- Ask the Ss to fill in the
blanks

Brainstorming

- Ss work in groups of 3 – 4
to find the Foods & Drinks

I. Vocabulary
shelf (n): kệ, bục, giá
kitchen (n): nhà bếp
sleep (n): giấc ngủ

under (prep): dưới, ở dưới
early (adj): sớm

II. Grammar Prcactice
1. Present simple tense

S + V(s/es) + O.
S + don’t / doesn’t + V(inf) + O.
Do / Does + S + V(inf) + O ?
Yes, S + do / does.

No, S + don’t / doesn’t.
a. like, like, do/like, I don’t like

b. does/like, likes, does/like, doesn’t
like

3. Adjectives
a. Short e. full
b. thin f. cold
c. light h. long
d. strong g. thin
2. a, an, some, any
a. any, any, some, an
b. any, some

c. any, some, a

IV. Summary (1p)

- Simple present tense, Using of a / an / some / any, Food + Drink Voc.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, do the exercises above again.
- Read and Do the exercises Reading Quiz P. 97 – 100.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 19 / 02 / 10

some

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

GRAMMAR PRACTICE

Period: 71

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practise speaking further practice
present progressive tense, question words, quantifiers,...

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids :
C. Methods: 
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 23 / 02 / 10 Cảnh, Hà

6B 23 / 02 / 10 Phúc, Quân

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Wordstorming

- Ss work in 2 teams

head
soda

arm

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

Eleciting Voc

- T reminds Ss of the
Grammar in Present
progressive.

Activity 1: Gap fill

- Ss work with the partners
then T helps Ss to correct
themselves.

Activity 2: Gap – fill

Ask the SS to read the

answers carefully, then to fill
in the blanks with the

question words.

Activity 3:Lucky numbers

- Ss work in 2 teams.

1. Present progressive tense
S + is / am / are + V - ing + O.
Is / Am / Are + V – ing + O ?
- Yes, S + is / am / are.

- No, S + is / am / are + not.

S + is / am / are + not + V - ing + O.
* Contrast 5 / 123

a. is eating d. is going
e. is getting b. are drinking

c. is riding f. is traveling
* Question words / 123
a. who b. what c. where
d. what e. where



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



116

-Body

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

(8p)

1. What does cooking oil come in? Key: - a bottle
2. What does tea come in? - a packet
3. What does soap come in? - a bar
4. LN!

5. What does soda come in? - a can
6. LN!

7. What does iced tea come in? - a glass
8. What do chocolates come in? - a box

9. What do noodles come in? - a bowl/ packet
10. What does water come in? - a bottle/ glass
11. LN!

12. What does toothpaste come in? - a tube

IV. Summary (1p)

- Present progressive tense, question words, quantifiers, body Voc...

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, do the exercies above again,

- Do the exercises Test yourself / 101 – 102 work book.
- Prepare for next period Test for 45ms.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 21 / 02 / 10

TEST FOR 45ms

Period: 72

A. Objectives

- Using “tobe”, Present simple, Present progressive tenses, “Would like...”, “How
much ...”, Voc in food, drink, the body...

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr & Voc they’ve learnt to do the
exercises given.

- Improve Ss’ skills in doing exercises.

B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, note papers, pens…

C. Methods: : Gap fill, Matching, Ordering, Multiple choice, Comprehension
Qs

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 26 / 02 / 10

6B 26 / 02 / 10

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

Step 1: Pre testing (2p)

- T gives the testing papers to Ss then Ss check the exercises.
- T helps Ss if necessary.

Step 2: While testing (40p)

- Ss do the exercises individually, T monitors the class.

The contents of the test

I. Listen and underline the words you hear.(2pts)

Our (1) (English / Math / History) teacher is Miss (2) (BESS / BETH /
BETT). She is (3) (tall / short / fat) and (4) (thin / slim / heavy). She is very pretty.
She has thin lips and brown (5) (eyes / hair). Her (6) (nose / face) is long and (7)
(big / small). She has (8) (long / short) hair. We all love her very much because she

is very kind to us.

II. Underline the one is differrent? (1pt)

1. beef meat chicken chair fish

2. lemonade carrot bean potato tomato

3. arm leg head hand bread

4. water rice milk soda coffee

III. Choose the best ones to complete the sentences (2pts)
1. What is your ………food? – I like chicken.

a. good b. hot c. favorite

2. How do you feel? – I……… cold.

a. is b. am c. are

3. ……..she like meat? – No, She doesn’t.

a. Do b. Does c. Are

4. What would you like …………breakfast?

a. for b. in c. at

5. She needs a bottle of ………

a. eggs b. soap c. cooking oil

6. ……….much is a cake? – It’s 2.500dong.

a. What b. Where c. How

7. She doesn’t want ………orange juice.

a. any b. some c. an

8. ………..I help you? – Yes, An ice – cream please!

a. Do b. Am c. Can

IV Read and answer the questions. (2pts)
Nam: How do you feel, Lan?

Lan: I’m hot and thirsty.
Nam: What would you like?

Lan: I’d like some orange juice. What about you?

Nam: I’m hungry. I’d like some noodles. Would you like noodles, Ba?
Ba: No, I wouldn’t. I’m tired. I’d like to sit down.

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

-1. How does Lan feel?  She is ____________________________

2. What would she like?  She _______________________________

3. What would Nam like? ___________________________________

4. How does Ba feel? _____________________________________

V. Fill in the blanks with “some / a / an / any” (1pt)
1. Do you have ………bananas?

2. She would like ………chicken and …………bowl of noodles.
3. There is …………orange on the table in the kitchen.

4. I don’t have …………..potatoes.

VI. Put the words or phrases in the correct order.(2pts)
1. like / you / do / noodles ?

………
2. Nga / short / fat / is / and.

………
3. would / some / I / like / apple juice.

………...
4. need / they / water / bottle / a / of.

………...

The keys:

I. Listen

1. English 2. BETH 3. tall 4. thin
5. eyes 6. nose 7. small 8. long
II.Which one is different?

1. chair 2. lemonade 3. bread 4. rice
III. Choose the best ones

1. c 2. b 3. b 4. a 5. c 6. c 7. a 8. c
IV Read and answer the questions

1. She is hot and thirsty. 2. She would like some orange juice.
3. Nam would like some noodles. 4. Ba is tired.

V. Ordering

1. Do you like noodles? 2. Nga is short and fat.

3. I would like some apple juice. 4. They need a bottle of water.

Step 3: Post testing(2p)

- T collects the testing papers.

IV. Summary (1p)
- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done.

V. Homework

- Review Gr + Voc in Unit 9 – Unit 11.
- Review the Present simple tense, Sport Voc.

Evaluation

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

Unit 12 : sports and pastimes ?

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Descrbe sporting activities and pastimes.
- Describe timetables.

- Talk about frequency.
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 2 Further practice in Present Progressive and
Sport Voc to talk about what people are doing.

P. 124 - 5
Lesson 2 A 3 - 5 “Which …?” Qs with sports Voc and Simple

Present tense to talk about people’s regular
exercise.

P. 125 - 6
Lesson 3 B 1 - 4 “What do you do in your spare time?” and

with “They / He / She” to talk about pastimes.

P. 127 - 8
Lesson 4 B 5 “How often …” Qs and Ans “Once / twice /

three times … a week” to talk about frequency
of activities.

P. 128 - 9
Lesson 5 C 1 - 4 Adverbs of frequency “always / usually /

sometimes …” and further practice in “How
often …?” to talk about frequency of activities

P. 130 - 1
Lesson 6 C 5 - 6 Reading a short text to understand the details

and get further practice in simple Present
Tense with Adverbs of frequency.

P. 132 - 3
Date of preparing: 22 / 02 / 10

UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 3 P. 124 - 125

Period: 73

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practise speaking further practice in
present progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing now.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures

C. Methods: Jumbled words, Dictation list, Picture cue drill, Noughts & Crosses
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 25 / 02 / 10 Bách, Hoàng

6B 01 / 03 / 10 Hồng, Tr. Tú

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

-II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Jumbled words

torps = sport maga = game sucim = music belvalylol = volleyball
- Ss work individually then T calls some to come to the board and do this.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Picture
Picture
Picture
Picture
Mime
Picture

Dictation list

T reads: play football, play 
tennis, jog, do aerobics, play 
table tennis, skip, swim, play 
volleyball.

Set the sence:
Picture a/ 124

Muốn biết người trong tranh
đang làm gì e sẽ hỏi cơ ntn?

Bạn ấy đang làm gì?

- T helps Ss to give more
examples.

Activity 1:

Picture & Wordcues drill

- T – Ss

Ss – Ss Half – Half
Open pairs – closed pairs.
- A 2 : Ss work in close pairs
Activity 2:Noughts & Croses

I. Vocabulary
swim (v): bơi

badminton (n): cầu long
skip (v): nhảy dây

aerobic (n): thể dục nhịp điệu

tennis (n): ten nis

jog (v): đi bộ thể dục
table tennis (n): bóng bàn

1 person 2 people
jog

do aerobics
skip, swim

Playfootball, play
tennisplay volleyball
play table tennis
II. Grammar
Present progressive tense.

* Hỏi đáp về hoạt động đang diễn ra
What is he / she doing?
are they

- He / She is playing soccer.
- They are

III. Practice
1. A 1/ 124

Ex: What is he doing?

- He is swimming.

2. A2 / 125

- Which sports do you do / play ?
- Ss work in 2 teams speaking as picture drill.

they / play soccer he / swim they / play volleyball
they / play tennis she / do aerobics they / play badminton
she / skip he / jog they / play tabletennis

IV. Summary (1p)

- Further practice in present progressive and sports Voc to talk about what people are
doing now.

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- Review Voc & Gr, practice A 1- 2 fluently.
- Do the exercises A 1 – 3 / 103 – 104 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 27 / 02 / 10

UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES

Lesson 2 :

A 4 – 5 P. 126

Period: 74

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practise reading short texts about sports
and practising “which questions” with simple present tense to talk about people’s
regular exercise.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, CD players.

C. Methods: Slap the board, Complete the table, Picture drill, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 02 / 03 / 10 Chiến, Hà

6B 02 / 03 / 10 Hoan, Nhất

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
- Slap the board:

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(10p)

Step 2
While
task

Activity 1: Pre reading

Open prediction
- Ss predict which sports
Lan and Nam like.

Activity 2: While reading
- Complete the table

- 1st reading: Ask Ss to

I. Read A 4 / 126

Lan Nam

1. 1.

2. 2.

3. 3.

answer key

Lan Nam



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



122

-Table tennis

Volleyball

Skip rope
jog

Swim

Tennis

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

(15p) read and check their
prediction

- 2nd reading: Ask Ss to

read and give

- Comprehension Qs

- Ss answer the Qs with
the partners.

- Give feetback
Activity 3:

Picture cue drill

- Ss pracitice asking with
friends in your class.

1. Swim 1. Play soccer
2. do aerobics 2. jog

3. play badminton 3. play table tennis
* Answer the Qs

a. She swims, does aerobics and plays
badminton.

b. No, she doesn’t.

c. He plays soccer, jogs and plays table
tennis.

d. Yes, he does.

II. Speak A3 / 125
Example:

S1: Which sports do you do?
S2: I swim

S1: What else?
S2: I play volleyball.

S1: Do you play table tennis?
S2: Yes, I do.

Step 3: Post task (8p)
* Survey:

Name Sports

...
...
...
...
...

IV. Summary (1p)

- “Which …?” Qs with sports Voc and Simple Present tense to talk about people’s
regular exercise.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, practice speaking A 3 again fluently.
- Do the exercises A 3 – 4 / 104 work book.

- Review Present Simple tense again.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 01 / 03 / 10

UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES

Lesson 3 :

B 1 – 2 P. 127

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to practise writing short texts about
what we do in our free time.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures

C. Methods: Picture cue drill, Guessing game, Chain game, Rub out &
Remember

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 04 / 03 / 10 Ng. Trang, Phi

6B 04 / 03 / 10 Quân, Thêm

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Guessing game:

- Example: I do aerobics in my free time.
S1: Do you play soccer in your free time?
S2: No, I don’t

S1: Do you watch TV?
S2: No, I don’t.

S1: Do you do aerobics in your free time ?
S2: Yes, I do

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Mime

Reminding
Actions
Situation
Actions

Rub out & Remember
- T reminds Ss of Present
Simple tense.

? Muốn biết bạn mình 
làm gì trong khi rảnh e se
hỏi bạn em nht?

- T helps Ss to give one
more example.

Activity 1: Picture Drill

A 1 / 127
T – Ss, Ss – Ss

I. Vocabulary

Free time = spare time: thời gian rảnh rỗi
(to) go fishing: đi câu cá

Jogging: đi bộ TD
shopping: đi mua sắm
camping: đi cắm trại
(to) fly kite: thả diều

II. Grammar
Present Simple tense:

Hỏi / Đáp về hoạt động trong tg rảnh rỗi:
What do you do in your free time?
does Nam his

- I read books.
- He plays soccer.

III. Practice
1. Speak B1 / 127

Example exchange:



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



124

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Open pairs -> closed pairs

Activity 2:

Transformation writing

- Ss work individually,
change “I” to “Phuong,
Ly…..”

Activity 3: Pyramid

- Ss write 3 things about
what they do in their free
time. In groupd they put
all their sentences

together on a poster.
- Ss work in groups of 3

a) A: What do you do in your free time?
B: I go to the movies.

b) A: What does Phuong do in his free
time?

B: He goes to the movies.
2. Write

a. Phuong goes to the movies in his free
time.

b. Ly ………
c. Nam ………
d. Lan ……….
Example: * Individual writing:
Ba: I watch TV, I go fishing, I play
football.

Hoa: I watch TV, I go to the park, I listen
to music.

Mai: I listen to music, I play football, I
play badminton.

* Group writing:

Ba and Hoa watch TV.
Ba and Mai play football.
Ba goes fishing.

………..

IV. Summary (1p)

- “What do you do in your spare time?” and with “They / He / She” to talk about
pastimes.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, Practice speaking as above again fluently.
- Do the exercises B 1- 3 / 104- 105 – workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 02 / 03 / 10

UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES

Lesson 4 :

B 3 – 5 P. 128 - 129

Period: 76

A. Objectives

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD player, wordcues, pictures

C. Methods: Matching, Substitution drill, Picture Drill, Find S.O who
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 05 / 03 / 10 Hiếu, Hai

6B 08 / 03 / 10 Hường, Huyền

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Matching: Listen B 3 / 128

Ss look at the pictures B.4 and call the name of the things before listening.
- Tapescrip: Tan reads, Minh and Nam play videogames, Lien watches TV,
Lan and Mai listen to music.

- Pictures: .a. Lien b. Lan and Mai e. Minh and Nam f. Tan

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Eleciting Voc

Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Situation
7 days

30 – 31 days
12 months
Matching:

I. Vocabulary

How often...? : thường xuyên ntn?
once = one time

twice = two times

three times (n): ba lần
day (n): ngày

week (n): tuần

month (n): tháng
year (n): năm
Once a week

Twice a week
Three time a
week

Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Satur Sun
v v

v
v

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Set the sence:
Open predictions:

Gap fill

Mai: …… often does Ly go
jogging?

Lien: She ... once a week.
Activity 1:

- Ss practice the dialogue B4
in closed pairs.

Activity 2: Picture drill

- Run through picture drill

II. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về mức độ thường
xuyên của hoạt động:

How often + do + S + V(inf) + O?
does

S + V(inf) + O + mức độ thg xuyên
III. Practice

1. go to school / six times a week
2. play tennis / once a week
3. read books / 3 times a week

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

-Step 3

B.5 Ly’s diary from Monday
to Sunday.

Ex:

A: How often does Ly go to
school?

B : She goes to school six
times a week.

Activity 3:

4. go to the movies / twice a week
5. play badminton / 5 times a week
6. listen to the radio / twice a day.
7. watch TV / three times a day.
8. go fishing / once a week
9. go jogging / once a day

Further Practice (8p)

Find S.O who ……

Find some one who ... Name
... plays football once a week

... goes to the park twice a week
.... watches TV seven times a week
.... play badminton twice a week
.... does homework six time a week

Hai

Ss work in groups of 7 – 8 then ask the Qs:
Ba: How often do you play football?
Hai: Once a week.

IV. Summary (1p)

- “How often …” Qs and Ans “Once / twice / three times … a week” to talk about
frequency of activities.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice speaking as above again fluently.
- Do the exercises B 4 – 5 / 105 – 106 workbook.

B5: Hoàn thành các câu hỏi về bản thân bạn.

B6: Hoàn thành câu về bạn, sử dụng “once / twice a week / everyday …..”

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 06 / 03 / 10

UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES

Lesson 5 :

C 1 – 4 P. 130 - 131

Period: 77

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to practise reading picture story to

understand the details and practise adverbs of frequency : always/ usually/

sometimes/ never.

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD player, poster

C. Methods: Noughts and crosses, Gap fill, Matching
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 09 / 3 / 10 Hoàng, Hồng

6B 09 / 3 / 10 Tư, N. Tùng

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
- Noughts and crosses. Using: How often do you ...?

swim read a book play tennis
go to school play foot ball do homework
watch TV listen to music play volleyball

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)
Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Actions
Picture

Activity 1: Matching

- T hangs poster on the
board and gives

instruction.

- Ask students to use the
pictures and read the text
and match the Vietnamese

I. Vocabulary
always (adv) : luôn luôn
usually (adv) : thường thường
often (adv) : thường xuyên

sometimes (adv): thỉnh thoảng, đôi khi
rarely (adv): hiếm khi

never (adv) : không bao giờ

(to) like walking….(like + V-ing…)
(to) go walking / fishing …

(go + Ving..): đi …….

(to) fly kite : thả diều
(to) go camping = to camp: đi cắm trại

II. Grammar

Gap-fill - C.2 (P. 130)

Ba and Lan ... go to the zoo.
They ... go to the park. They ... play

sports. They ... go camping. They ...
walk to school and do their home work.
How often do they…? Never Always Often Usually sometimes

- go to the zoo 

- go to the park 

- have a picnic 

- do sports 

- fly kite 

- go camping 

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

-- walk to school 

- do homework 

Activity 2:

- Ask students to guess the items
in the grids

- Ask students to read the text and
corrects their doing.

Activity 3:

T. asks students some questions
about the adverbs of freequency.
- Students answer

* Answer key - C3 - p130

1. How often do they go to the zoo?
(About 3 times a year)

2. How often do they go to the park?
3. Do they go camping?

* C4 - P131

- Note: Trạng từ năng diễn đứng sau “to be,
trước động từ thường.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Adverbs of frequency “always / usually / sometimes …” and further practice in
“How often …?” to talk about frequency of activities

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text A1 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises C 1 – 3 / 106 - 107

Evaluation

……….

……….
……….
Date of preparing: 08 / 3 / 10

UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES

Lesson 6 :

C 5 – 6 P.132

Period: 78

A. Objectives

- Reading a short text to understand the details and get further practice in simple
present tense, adverbs of frequently and out door pastimes vocabulary

- By the end of the lesson student will be able to practice in simple present tense,
adverbs of frequently and out door pastimes vocabulary.

- Improve reading skill.

B. Teaching aids : Textbook, poster, pictures

C. Methods: ROR, Transformation writing, Matching, Jumbled words
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 11 / 3 / 10 Kha, Sơn

6B 11 / 3 / 10 Chung, Trường

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

Matching: Listen C5 - P132

- Ask students to predict how often do Nga and Lan do these things?
- T. shows these pictures, adverbs of frequency and runs through.
- Ask students to listen and check their predictions.

- T. reads: (play the tape)

1: Nga and Lan never go camping.
2. They sometimes go to the zoo.
3. They often go to the park.
4. They often play sports.

5. They usually have a picnic in the park.

Answer key: a. never, b. sometimes, c. often, d. often, e. usually
III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Situation
Actions
Picture
Situation
Picture draw
Explaination
Explaination
Jumbled words

1. tosve 2. tobos
3. colthes 4. ewar

Activity 1:

- T presents the text using
picture draw.

- Ss listen and read the
passange silently

- Runs through all questions
Activity 2:

- Ask students to read the text
again and prepare answering

the questions in 3 minutes
Activity 3: Lucky numbers
1 – a 2 – L 3 – f 4 – d
5 – L 6 – c 7 – b 8 – e
Activity 3:

Transformation writing

- Form the text C 6 P132
a. Ask students change "Minh
to I"

I. Vocabulary
weekend (n): ngày cuối tuần
friend (n): bạn

wear (v): mang, mặc, đeo kính
boots (n): đơi ủng

warm (adj): ấm, ấm áp
clothes (n): quấn áo
stove (n): lò

overnight (n): qua/suốt đêm
II. Read
Minh

Lucky number (questions C6 - P133)
Answer key:

a. Minh likes walking.

b. They always wear strong boots and
warm clothes.

c. He goes on the weekend.

d. He usually goes with 2 friends.
e. He often goes in the mountain.
f. They take food, water, and a
camping stove

Writing C6 / 132

Eg: I like …. on the weekend. I often



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



130

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

Practice
(8p)

b. For strong students, change
"Minh to I" and use net work
for new ideas.

….., I usually go with ………I and my 
friends always wear ….. and we 
always take …. sometimes, we….

IV. Summary (1p)

- Reading a short text to understand the details and get further practice in simple
Present Tense with Adverbs of frequency.

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, read the text above again carefully.
- Finish the exercises writing above in the note books.
- Finish the exercises in Unit 12 - workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASON

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Descrbe the weather.
- Express freferences.

- Talk about sports and activities.
- Talk about frequency.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects

III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 Temperature and seasons Voc with “What’s
the weather like?” to talk about the weather in
each season.

P. 134 - 5
Lesson 2 A 2 - 3 “What weather do you like?” to talk about

favorite weather and contrast it with “What’s
the weather like?”

P. 135
Lesson 3 B 1 - 4 “When” clauses in positive statements and

“Wh” Qs.

P. 136
Lesson 4 B 5 Further practice in Adverbs of frequency,

Simple present, sports Voc, Seasons.

P. 138 - 9
Lesson 5 C 1 - 4 Writing about activities you do in different

seasons.

P. 139

Date of preparing: 09 / 3 / 10

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

Period: 79

A. Objectives

- Temperature and season Voc with "What is the weather like?" - To talk about the
weather in each season.

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to ask and answer the weather in each
season.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids : Textbook, poster, pictures

C. Methods: Matching, Picture cue drill, Subtitution table, Rabbit and carots
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 12 / 3 / 10 V. Anh, Thuỷ

6B 15 / 3 / 10 Trường, V. Thương

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Rabbit and carrot

- T. shows the pictures and asks.

- T. says: Món ăn u thích của thỏ là cà rốt.
Chúng ta hãy giúp thỏ lấy đc củ cà rốt.

- T. gives instruction: I have a word. It has
10 letters. (Là một từ chỉ chung cho các từ:
watch TV, play soccer, listen to music, play
game, play badminton …)

- Ask students to get the letter (one st one
letter)

- The T asks: Who can say the word?
What does this word mean?

carrot

ACTIVITIVIES rappit

III. New lesson

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

-Step 1
Presentation
(10p)
Step 2
Practice
(15p)
Step 3
Production
Eleciting Voc

Examples
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Examples
Explaination
Explaination
Matching

- Ss match the weather
with the seasons and
times

Activity 1:
a. Set the scene:
Who are they?

What are they talking
about?

Which season are they
talking about?

Activity 2:

Picture cues drill

A 1 - 2 / 134 - 135

Example exchange A2
T – Ss Ss – Ss
Open pairs – closed
pairs.

Activity 3:

Subtitution table (8p)

I. Vocabulary

* The season (n): mùa
the spring (n) : mùa xuân
the summer (n) : mùa hè

the fall (n) : mùa thu = Autumn
the winter (n): mùa đông

* Weather (n): thời tiết
warm (adj): ấm áp
cool (adj): mát mẻ

cold
cool
warm
hot
spring
summer
fall
winter

- June, July, August
- September, October,
November

- December, January,
February

- march, April, May



Mary



II. Grammar
Cách hỏi đáp về thời tiết

Ex: What is the weather like in Viet Nam?
What is the weather like today?

- It is hot.

What is the weather like …………?
- The weather is ………..

- It is + Adj (thời tiết). (It’s ………)
III. Practice

Our
My
The

morning, afternoon, evening,
flowers, trees, house,

mountains, river, weather, lake
is
are

cold,cool,warm,hot,
yellow,green,blue,gre
y, fall,beautiful

- Ss do in groups (one for each season) and each group makes a poster
In the spring in the summer in the fall in the winter

- Ss write it up in groups – Eg:

In the spring
The afternoon is
warm

The evening is cool
The rice is green
Our trees are
beautiful

In the summer
The night is hot
The river is
warm

The lake is blue
The flowers are
fall

In the fall
The morning is cool
The evening is
beautiful

My house is cool

In the winter
The morning is
grey

The mountains
are cold

Our house is cold

Weather / 370C

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

IV. Summary (1p)

- Temperature and seasons Voc with “What’s the weather like?” to talk about the
weather in each season.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice talking about the weather again carefully and fluently/

- Do the exercise A 1 / 108 – workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 13 / 3 / 10

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS

Lesson 2 :

A 2 – 3 P. 135

Period: 80

A. Objectives

-"What weather do you like?" to talk about your favorite weather and contrast it with
"What is the weather like?"

- By the end of the lesson student will be able to understand the "What weather do
you like?" to talk about your favorite weather and contrast it with: "What's the
weather like …?"

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

B. Teaching aids : Textbook, poster, pictures

C. Methods: Picture cues drll, Word square, Mapped dialogue
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 16 / 3 / 10 Nhuận, Ngọc

6B 16 / 3 / 10 Thêm, N. Linh

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Word square

T. hangs poster on the board and divides
the class into 2 groups

- Give instruction: Ask students to go
the board and circle some adjs to talk
about the weather in the seasons.

* Key:

fall, cold, warm, sits, cool, weather
hot, winter, like

go, so, me, sea, on, summer, season

F A L L C O L D

X W A R M N S S

G N I R P S U E

O N L N I O M A

T H S I T S M S

C O O L K E E O

W E A T H E R N

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

-Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Gr

Presentation a text A.2
again.

Give model sentences.
- Ss find the form with T’s
help.

Activity 1: Picture cues 
drill A 3 / 135

Examples exchange:

What weather do you like?
- I like hot weather.

T – Ss Ss – Ss

Openpairs – closed pairs
Activity 2:Mapped 
dialogue

A: What is the weather like
in Ha noi?

B: It is cold.

A: What weather do you
like?

B: I like hot weather.
A: Come to Can tho now.
B: What is the …..Can tho?
……….

I. Grammar

Cách hỏi đáp về thời tiết ưa thích

What’s the weather like in the summer?
- It’s hot

What weather do you like?
- I like hot weather.

What weather do / does + S + like?
- S + like(s) + weather.

II. Practice

a. I / hot weather
c. She / cool weather

b. We / cold weather
d. They / warm weather

22oc Can tho 12oc Ha noi

What is ………
in Ha noi?

What weather
…… like?
Come to Can tho

……. hot.

…cold weather.

……. Cold.
…hot weather.
What is ………
in Can tho?

What weather
…… like?
Come to Ha noi.

IV. Summary (1p)

-"What weather do you like?" to talk about your favorite weather and contrast it with
"What is the weather like?"

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice talking about the weather and favorite weather again.
- Do the exercises A 2 – 3 /108 – 110 work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 14 / 3 / 10

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS

Lesson 3 :

A 4 – 5 P. 136

Period: 81

A. Objectives

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

Pastime
s
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Picture, textbook, CD players

C. Methods: Wordstorming, Wordcues drill, Transformation writing
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 17 / 3 / 10 Phương, Quang

6B 17 / 3 / 10 Ngân, Bách

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Wordstorming

The keys:

listen to music, go jogging, watch TV, play soccer
go fishing, read book, go swimming, play badminton
go to the park, play table tennis

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Activity 1:

Word cues drill

- T. runs through all the cues

- Give example

Example exchange:

What do you do when it hot?
I go swimming.

- Ask students to practice in
pairs

Activity 2:

Transformation writing

a. Ss change the text about Ba
and write about themselves
b. Ss swap the books and read
their partner's text then write
about their partner

- T. check students'
understanding

Who's your partner Lan?

I. Grammar
When (nvt): khi nào, bao giờ
khi, khi mà

What does Ba do when it’s hot?

cold?
cool?
warm?
- He goes camping.

S1: What does / do + S + do + when
it’s ...?

S2: S + V(s) ... when it’s ...
* when clause – Adverb of time
1. You /. hot / swimming

2. She / cold / go jogging
3. He / warm / do aerobics
4. Nam / cool / go fishing
III. A4 - P136

a. Ba - I

Eg: When it's hot, I go swimming.

The keys:

When it’s cold, I plays soccer.
When it’s cool, I go jogging.
When it’s warm, I go fishing.

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

-Who will you write about?
- If have time ask Ss to go to

the board and write about
their partner.

Eg: (Lan writes)

When it is hot, Hoa goes swimming.

IV. Summary (1p)

- “When” clauses in positive statements and “Wh” Qs.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice speaning and writing as above again fluently.
- Do the exercises A 4 / 112 – workbook, finish the exercise writing above.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 15 / 3 / 10

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS

Lesson 4 :

B 1 P. 138 - 139

Period: 82

A. Objectives

- Further practice in Adverbs of Frequency, Simple present, Sports Voc, Seasons
- By the end of the lesson student will be able to practice in Adverbs of Frequency,
Simple present, Sports Voc, Seasons

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating. Interest Ss in learning English.
B. Teaching aids : Textbook, poster, word cues

C. Methods: Matching, Bingo game, Answers given, Word cues drill, Lucky
numbers

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 18 / 3 / 10 T. Tú, Thanh

6B 22 / 3 / 10 Huyền, Linh

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Matching:

    

Always usually often sometimes never
- Ss work individually.

Bingo: Sports’ name

T reads: Swimming, jogging, badminton, soccer, volley ball, aerobics, tennis, table
tennis, fishing, sailing. skipping

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Actions

Actions

Rub out & remember
Activity 1: Answer given

Presentation text
- T. reads model

- T. runs through and asks
students to make questions
from the answers and
depending on the text.

- T. gives example

- Ask students to prepare
answering in 4 minutes then
ask students give their
questions

- T. corrects and checks
Activity 2:

Word cues drill

- Ask students to use the
question from "Answer
given" to practice

- T. gives example.

- Ask students to practice in
pairs.

Activity 3:

Lucky numbers

- T. writes on the board the
numbers, each number has a
question or no

- Ask students answer the
questions with what they
really do.

- 4, 6, 9 lucky numbers

I. Vocabulary

(to) play basketball : chơi bóng rổ
(to) go sailing : đi bơi thuyền

II. B1 - P138
* Give the Qs to these answers
1. We often play volleyball.
2. They sometimes go sailing.
3. I often go swimming.
4. He never goes fishing.

5. She usually plays badminton.
6. We always play basketball.
* Answer key:

1. What do you do in the spring?
2. What do they do in the fall?
3. What do you do in the summer?

4. What does she do in the fall?
5. What does she do in the fall?
6. What do you do in the winter?

P1: What do you do in the spring?
P2: We often play volleyball.

* Questions:

1. What is the weather like in the
winter?

2. What do you usually do in the fall?
3. What do usually eat in the winter?
5. What's the weather like in the
spring?

7. Where do you usually go in the
summer?

8. What weather do you like?
10. Which sports do you do in the
winter?

IV. Summary (1p)

- Adverbs of Frequency, Simple present, Sports Voc, Seasons

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text B1 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises B1, 2 / 110 – 113 work book.

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

-Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 20 / 3 / 10

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS

Lesson 5 :

B 2 P. 139

Period: 83

A. Objectives

- Present Simple tense, activities in free time Voc

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking season vocabulary and
Wh – questions in simple present.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating interest Ss in learning English.
B. Teaching aids : CD players, poster

C. Methods: Net work, Board drill, Survey, Write it up
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 23 / 3 / 10 Thu, Hà

6B 23 / 3 / 10 N. Tùng, L. Anh

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Net work: Ss work in groups of 4 - 5

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

T explain the mpdel
sentences

Activity 1:

Board drill

- T. shows the picture

- T. says:

The park in the summer.
- T. models – Ss listen

Model sentences

What do + S + do + in the summer?
does spring ?
- S + adv of frequency + V (s/es) + …...
Eg:

P1: What do you do in the summer?
P2: I usually go to the park.

* Make dialogue with a partner:
Eg:

Activities in the
winter

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

and repeat chorrally and
individually.

- Ss do in pairs.
- Practice speaking
- Free practice
- Feed back

Activity 2:

Survey

- Ask students to work in
groups of 4 students (a
student will be a
secretary)

- T. gives instruction:
each student to ask other
3 questions.

Activity 3: Write it up

- Ask students to write
about their friends they
have interviewed, using
3rd person singular.

- Ask students to write
about themselves.

- T. gives example.

What do you do in the fall?
-> I often go jogging in the fall.

a. We often play volleyball in the spring.
b. They sometimes go sailing in the fall.
c. He often goes swimming in the summer.
d. She usually plays badminton in the fall.
e. Nam always plays basketball in the
winter.

Name Seasons Weather Usually do

Hoa fall cool Do

aerobics
Example exchange:

P1: What is your name?
P2: My names is (Hoa)

P1: Which season do you like?
P2: I like the (fall)

P1: What's the weather like in the …?
P2; It's (cool).

P1: What do usually do in the (fall)?
P2: I do aerobics.

* Write:

In the spring, I often play soccer, I often
play volleyball, I usually ride my bike and
I always go to school.

Eg: In the spring, I ….

IV. Summary (1p)

- Season vocabulary and Wh – questions in simple present.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice the task above again fluently.
- Do the exercises B3 / 113 work book.

- Review Gr & Voc in Unit 13 again carefully.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….

Unit 14 : MAKING PLANS

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

-I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Talk about vacation plans, free time plans.
- Talk about durtation.

- Make suggestions.
- Express preferences
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 3 “going to” Future, positive statements and
“Wh” Qs to talk about vacation plans.

P. 140 - 1
Lesson 2 A 4 - 5 Read a text about vacation plans to get the

details and practice “goin to” with sequencing
words “First, then, next, after that, finally …”

P. 142 - 3
Lesson 3 B 1 - 4 Further speaking practice with “going to” ta

talk about plans for near future.

P. 144 - 5
Lesson 4 B 5 - 6 Further listening and reading practice with

“going to”.

P. 145 - 6
Lesson 5 C 1 - 3 Making suggestions with “Let’s ….” And

responding; further practice in “want to …”

P. 147 - 9
Lesson 6 Grammar

Practice

Further practice in Simple present, Adverbs of
frequency, Present progressive, “going to”
future, weather Voc.

O. 150 - 3

Date of preparing: 22 / 3 / 10

UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 3 P. 140 - 141

Period: 84

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to know more about going to the
future, positive statements and “ Wh - questions’ to talk abut vocation plans.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD player, poster, wordcues

C. Methods: Brainstorming, wordcue drill, Comprehension Qs, Find S.O who
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 25 / 3 / 10 N. Trang, Tr. Tú

6B 25 / 3 / 10 Hân, Linh

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

Listen to music

read book watch TV

Play video games go jogging
Fly kites
go for a walk go fishing
play badminton

go camping

play soccer go swimming do aerobics
- Ss work in groups of 5 – 6.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Situation
Translation
Explaination
Examples
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination
Examples
Explaination

Rub out & remember
Activity 1:

Comprehension Qs

- Ss work individually
to find the answers.

- Give feed back
Activity 2:
Eleciting Gr

Ss find the form from
the dialogue.

Activity 3:

Word cue drill

- T. runs through all
the cues

T. gives model
-students repeat

- Ss practice as the
dialogue A1 / 140

I. Vocabulary
vacation (n): kỳ nghỉ

visit (v): tham quan, thăm viếng
stay (v): ở lại

uncle (n): bác (trai), chú, dượng
aunt (n) : cô, bác (gái), dì …
How long ………? : bao lâu
citadel (n): thành nội/luỹ

beach (n): bãi biển

bay (n): vịnh

II. Listen and read
1. Answer the Qs

a. Lan’s going to visit Huế.

b. She’s going to stay with her aunt and
uncle.

c. She’s going to stay for a week.
d. She’s going to visit the citadel.
2. Grammar

- Near future tense

S + is / am / are + going to + V(inf) + O.
S + is / am / are + not + going to +
V(inf) + O.

Is / Am / Are + going to + V(inf) + O?
- Yes / S + tobe.

- No + S + tobe + not.
3. Practice

Example exchange:

P1: What are you going to do this summer?
P2: I am going to visit Hue.

* Cues
 Visit Hue

Visit the Citadel
 stay in a hotel
Visit Bach Ma park.



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



142

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Activity 4

Find S.O who…?

- T. draws table on
the board and asks
students to copy
- Give instruction

camp in the mountains
 Stay in a tent

Find someone who is going to
…

Name
- …stay at home.

- …visit an aunt and uncle.
- … visit a new city.

- … stay in a hotel.

- … camp in the mountain.
- … stay in a tent.

Example exchange:

P1: Are you going to stay at home?
P2: Yes, I am. / No, I am not.

IV. Summary (1p)

- “going to” Future, positive statements and “Wh” Qs to talk about vacation plans.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice the dialogue A1 / 140 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises A 1 – 2 / 114 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 23 / 3 / 10

UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS

Lesson 2 :

A 4 – 5 P. 142 - 143

Period: 85

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson,Students will be able to practice reading a text about
vacation plans to understand the details and practice “going to” in future and
fequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures

C. Methods: Guessing game, Matching, Ordering, Transformation writing
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 26 / 3 / 10 Thuỷ, Mạnh

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Guessing game:

I am going to visit ...

- Ss write a sentence (one by one) in to the paper , call one pupil to go to the board
and others Ss make questions : Yes – No . If there is a student guess right -> read
aloud. Ss guess right -> replace other Ss.

Ex: Are you going to visit (Halong)?
- No, I’m not / Yes, I am.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Examples
Explaination
Explaination
Explaination

Explaination
Explaination
Picture
Picture

Rub out & remember

Activity 1: Matching

T. hangs poster on the board
and runs through.

- Divides the class into 2
groups

- Gives instruction: Ask
students from each group to
go to the board and match the
words in column A with the
right place in column B.
Activity 2: Ordering

T: Phuong and Mai are going
to visit the five places.

You’ve matched in this
summer vacation. Where are
they going to go first?

Second? Third? … With a

partner, discuss the order
Activity 3: Complete the 
table

I. Vocabulary
a temple đền, chùa
first : đầu tiên, trước tiên
then : sau đó

next : tiếp đến
after that : sau đó
finally : cuối cùng

cat (n) con mèo
dog (n) con chó

* Poster

1. Bến Thành
market

2. The beach
3. The Citadel
4. Ngoc Son
Temple

5. Ha Long Bay

Nha Trang
HCM City
Ha Noi
Quang Ninh
Hue

II. Listen and read
Number Guess Read
1

2
3
4
5

HLBay Ha Long Bay
Ha Noi

Hue

Nha Trang
HCM City

Place to visit Where to stay How long what to do
First

Then
Next

Ha Long
Bay

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

-After that

Finally HCM City

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Board drill

- Ask students to look at the
gird and ask

Activity 4:

Transformation writing

- Base on the text P142 ask
students to write plans for
their summer vocation

- T. reminds change “They”
to ‘I”

- T. gives model then ask
students to write

- T. collects and checks.

Example exchange:

1. Where are they going to first?
2. They are going to visit HLBay
first.

3. Where are they going to stay?
4. They are going to stay....

5. How long are they going to stay?
6. For 2 days.

7. What are they going to do?
8. They are going to ...

* Model:

I am going to...

IV. Summary (1p)

- Read a text about vacation plans to get the details and practice “goin to” with
sequencing words “First, then, next, after that, finally …”

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr (near future tense), read the text again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 27 / 3 / 10

UNIT 13 : MAKING PLANS

Lesson 3 :

B 1 – 4 P. 144 - 145

Period: 86

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson student will be able to practice with “Going to” to talk
about plans for the future.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Posters, picture draw

C. Methods: Finding friends, Chain game, Board drill, Mapped dialogue
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 30 / 3 / 10 Hiên, Ninh

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Finding friends

Homework My friend A soccer match Badminton A movie Mom
see

play
do
visit
help
go
watch








- Ss work with the partners.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Translation
Explaination

What& where

Activity 1:
- Ss listen and
repeat. Then
from the

dialogue T
asks Ss to find
the forms.
Eleciting Gr
T: muốn biết 
KH của cô 
vào tối nay e 
xẽ hỏi cô ntn?

- T helps Ss to
find the form
Activity 2:

Board drill

- Ask students
to use the
Finding

friends as cues
- T gives
example

I. Vocabulary
tonight (n): tối nay

tomorrow (n): ngày mai

II. Listen and repeat

III. Grammar

Near future tense with “going to” to talk about
plans:

What are you going to do tonight?
tomorrow?
on the weekend?
this summer vacation?
- I am going to ...

Example exchange:

P1: What are you going to do tonight?
P2: I am going to do my homework.

* Com plete the dialogue

Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I am going to....

Tuan: What are you going to do tomorrow?
Activity3: Gap fill

- Read the dialogue and fill in
the gaps in pairs.

- T. collects on the board

Lan: It’s Sunday. I am going to...

Then, we are going to...
What about you?

Tuan: Tonight, I am going to... tomorrow.

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

-- Than ask students to read B1
P144 to check their prediction.
Activity 4:

Mapped dialogue

I am going to...
II. B2 P144

Nam

What are you going ....tonight?
I am going to help my mom.
...tomorrow?

...play volleyball.

Nga

I am going to see a movie.

...tonight?

...go walking.
...tomorrow?

Step 3(8p)

Further Practice

Chain game

- Ask students to practice
speaking in groups of 3
students, using the sentences.
(B4 P 145)

III. B4 – P145
Example

P1: On Saturday morning, I am going to
shopping.

P2: On Saturday morning, I am going to
shopping, on Saturday afternoon; I am going
to watch soccer match.

P3: On Saturday morning, I am going to
shopping, on Saturday afternoon, I am going
to watch soccer match and on Saturday
evening, I am going to see a movie.

P4: ...

IV. Summary (1p)

- Further speaking practice with “going to” ta talk about plans for near future.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice the dialogue B1 + 3 / 144 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises B 1 2 3 / 115 – 116 work book.

B2: Ex: Tomorrow morning, Hoa is going to jog round the park with Mai, and she is
going to visit ...

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 28 / 3 / 10

UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS

Lesson 4 :

B 5 – 6 P. 145 - 146

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practice reading and listening with
“going to” to talk about future plans.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures

C. Methods: Slap the board, Matching, Comprehension Qs, Write it up.
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 01 / 4 / 10 Chiến, Phương

6B 01 / 4 / 10 Huyền, D. Thương

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Slap the board

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(18p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination

Actions
Situation

Brainstorming

Activity 1:

Set the scene:



Minh





His friends
- Who are they?

- T. says: Minh and his
friends are going to have a
picnic.

Activity 2:

Comprehension Qs

- Ask students to read
questions and guess the
answers

- Ask students to read the text
and check their predict
answer.

Activity 3: Matching

. Prediction

I. Vocabulary
bring (v) mang, đem theo

camera (n) máy ảnh, máy quay phim
(to) take a photo (v) chụp ảnh

hat

tent food
II. Practice
1. Read B5 / 145

* Questions:

1. Where are they going to go?

2. What 3 things are they going to
bring?

3. What are they going to do there?
* Answer key:

1. near a lake

2. a camera, food and drink
3. take photos

2. Listen B6 / 146

* Matching

A B



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



148

-a kite foods

drink

tent

a warm clothes

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

- Ss predict and match names
with right things.

Tape scrip: Vui and her
friends are going to camp for
three days in Sapa. Vui is
going to bring a tent and
some food. Lan is going to
bring a ball. Ly is going to

bring her camera to take some
photos. Nga and Mai are
going to bring some drinks.
- T. read B6 - P145

- Ask students to listen and
check their prediction

Activity 4:

Comprehension Qs

- T. ask students some
questions

Write it up

- Write sentences about the
girls from Listening exercise
B6 / 145.

Vui
Ly
Lan
Mai
Nga

a ball
a camera
a tent

some food
some drinks

* Key:

Vui: a tent, some food
Lan: a ball

Ly: a camera
Mai and Nga: some drinks

* Questions

1. Where are the girls going to
camping? (Sa Pa)

2. What is Lan going to bring?

(A ball)

3. Who is going to bring a tent? (Vui)

4. How many days are the girls going
to camp for? (3 days)

* Writing

Ex: Vui is going to bring some food 
and a tent.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Practice speaking the further listening and reading practice with “going to”

V. Homework (4p)
- Review Voc & Gr, read the text B5 / 145 again.
- Finish the exercise write it up above in the note book.
- Do the exercises Test yourself / 122 – 125 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 30 / 3 / 10

UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS

Lesson 5 :

C 1 – 3 P. 147 - 149

Period: 88

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice making suggestions with
“Let’s….” and responding, the further practice in“ want to (do) .”

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pistures, posters

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 02 / 4 / 10 Ngọc, T. Hồng

6B 05 / 4 / 10 Tư, Quân

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Noughts and crosses

Using near future tense to make sentences and the Qs: “What+ be +S + going to ...?”
They/ go shopping we / watch a soccer match she / have a picnic

Mrs. Ha/ go fishing He/ do his home work they/ go sailing

they/go swimming Nam/ listen to music Lan / watch TV
- Ss work in 2 teams

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2

Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Translation
Untonym # near

Explaination
Example

Rub out & remember
Activity 1:

Listen and read then answer
the Qs

Activity 2:

- Ss find the form with
teacher’s help.

Activity 3: Picture drill: C.3

I. Vocabulary
good idea: ý kiến hay

that’s a good idea: đó là 1 ý kiến hay
far: xa

minibus (n): ơ tơ (buýt) 8 -> 12 chỗ
pagoda (n): chùa

II. Listen and read
1. Answer the Qs / 148
a. Nam wants to go Huế.

b. Nga wants to go to Hương pagoda.
c. Lan wants to walk there.

d. B/c it’s too far.

e. Nam wants to go there by bike.
f. B/c it’s too hot.

g. Ba wants to there by minibus
2. Grammar

Let’s = let us

(Là câu mệnh lệnh dùng để đưa ra 1
đề nghị, 1 lời khuyên có nghĩa)
Eg: Let’s go to Hue.

- Model sentences:

S1: Let’s go camping
walk there
go by minibus

S2: That’s a good idea.
Or: No, I don’t want to.

Let’s + V(inf)…..

What about V(ing)……?

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

-Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

a. go to the beach / v
b. visit Museum / v
c. play volley ball / x
d. take some photos / x
e. play bad minton / v

f. go camping / x

Activity 4: Mapped dialogue

Why don’t we + go + V …?

* That’s good idea./Yes, Good idea.

* No, I don’t want to ……
II. Practice
Example exchange:

P1: Let's go to the beach.

P2: That's a good idea.

You

………see a movie
No, ……….. too hot.
…….. go to the museum.
No, ………. go by minibus.

Your friend

No, ……… go to the beach.

Yes, …….. walk.
Yes.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Making suggestions with “Let’s…. / Why don’t we…./ What about …….” and
responding, the further practice in“ want to (do) .”

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practice the dialogue C1 / 147 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises C 1 – 3 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 03 / 4 / 10

GRAMMAR PRACTICE

Period: 89

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about further practice in present
simple, adverbs of frequency, present progressive “going to’ future, the weather.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : pictures, posters

C. Methods: Gap fill, Qs & Answers, Transformation writing, Brainstorming
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 06 / 4 / 10 Mai, Thi

6B 06 / 4 / 10 Lâm, N. Phong

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Brainstorming:

Spring warm

- Ss work individually.

- Ss work in pairs asking and answering about the weather in each season.
Ex: What is the weather like in the ………?

- It is ………in the …….

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(15p)

Step 2
Practice

(20p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Action

Explaination
Examples
Translation

What & Where

Activity 1: Gap fill

- T runs through then asks
some Ss to come to the board
and write the answers

Activity 2:
- Answer the Qs
Activity 3: Gap - fill

- Review: Present progressive
am

S + is + V(ing) + …
are

- Ss work with the partners.
Activity 4:

- Review: near future
Be going to + infinitive

- Ask SS to ask and answer

about “going to”.
Activity 5:

Transformation writing

Nb: The example text can
be used for transformation
writing. Ss change the under
lined words.

I. Vocabulary
(to) dive: lặn

(to) win chiến thắng
show (n) buổi diễn

a soccer match: một trận bóng đá
II. Grammar Practice
1. Present simple tense:

a. Do – like – do – play – do – don’t
b. does – does – likes – does – plays –
doesn’t

c. do – do – do – don’t

2. Adverbs of frequency (trạng từ chỉ
tính thường xuyên)

Always – ussually – often – 
sometimes – rarely – never.

3. Present progressive tense:

a. am watching – playing – is winning
b. is cooking – aren’t – is

c. am doing – am reading
4. Future “going to”

What are they going to do?
a. They are going to play soccer.
b. They are going to play tennis.
c. They are going to have a picnic.
d. He is going to go swimming.
e. She is going to watch T.V.

f. She is going to cook/ to have lunch/
or dinner.

6. Future plans.
Example:

I’m going to go to Sapa with my
friends, Mai and Lan . We’re going
to bring warm clothes with us and
going to bring my camera. We’re
going to travel by train. In Sapa,



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



152

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

- Ss work individually. Then
give feed back.

we’re going to stay in a hotel .
We’re going to walk in the montains
and we’re going to go fishing.

e. Suggestion

Let's + V … = What/ How + about +
V-ing …….?

IV. Summary (1p)

- Further practice in present simple, adverbs of frequency, present progressive “going
to” future, the weather.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr in Unit 12 – Unit 14 to prepare for the test next period.
- Do the exericises Grammar practice again.

- Do the exercises in Unit 12 – 14 / work book again.

Evaluation

……….

……….
……….
Date of preparing: 03 / 4 / 10

TEST FOR 45ms

Period: 90

A. Objectives

- Using Present simple, Present progressive tenses, Future tense with “going to …”,
weather / sport & pastimes Voc …

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr & Voc they’ve learnt to do the
exercises given.

- Improve Ss’ skills in doing exercises.

B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, note papers, pens…

C. Methods: : Write it up, Matching, Ordering, Multiple choice, Comprehension
Qs

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 07 / 4 / 10

6B 07 / 4 / 10

II. Revision / Warmer
III. New lesson
Step 1: Pre testing (2p)

- T gives the testing papers to Ss then Ss check the exercises.
- T helps Ss if necessary.

Step 2: While testing (40p)

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

The contents of the test
I. Listen and underline the ones you hear. (2pts)

This (1) (summer / winter / spring) I am going to (2) (stay / help / visit) my (3)
(uncle / mother / father) in the country for (4) (two / three / four) weeks. I am going
to stay on the farm. I am going to (5) (skip / swim / have) in the river with my (6)
(friends / uncle / father). I am going to play (7) (badminton / volleyball / soccer) in
the afternoon. I am going to (8) (go / do / play) fishing….

III. Circle the best one to complete the sentences. (2,5pts)

1. What about ………. rope?

a. skip b. to skip c. skipping

2. I’m thirsty. I’d like some ………

a. meat b. drinks c. rice

3. Does she ……….aerobics every day?

a. do b. go c. run

4. The weather is ……….in the summer.

a. hot b. cold c. cool

5. Let’s ………….to some music now.

a. to listen b. listening c. listen

6. How ………..does he go to the movies? – Once a month.

a. often b. much c. many

7. We can see Ngoc Son temple in ……….

a. Ha Noi b. Ho Chi Minh City c. Hue

8. When it becomes hot, people often feel ...

a. hungry b. thirsty c. worried

9. Why don’t we ... to Ha Noi capital?

a. going b. go c. to go

10. Why don’t we go to the movie theater? - ...

a. Yes, he does Because he is tired c. Yes, good idea

III. Read the text then answer the questions.(3pts)

Hi! We are Quang and Minh. We are in grade 6. we learn at Quang Trung
school. We like walking.On the weekend, we often go walking in the mountains. In
the spring, we often play table tennis. We usually play badminton in the fall. We
sometimes go fishing in the winter. We always go swimming in the summser. We
like summer very much.

1. Which grade are Quang and Minh in?

...

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

-2. What do Quang and Minh do in the spring?

...
3. What do they do in the fall?

...
4. Do they sometimes go swimming in the winter?

...
5. What do they do in the summer?

...
6. Do they like summer?

...

IV. Complete the sentences using your own words. (1pt)

1. On Saturday morning I am going to ...
2. On Saturday afternoon I ...

V. Order the words to make meaningful sentences. (1,5pt)

1. What / to / going / vacation / are / do / summer / you / this ?

...
2. the / often / spring / we / table / tennis / in / play.

...
3. Hoa / once / a / week / visits / her granparents.

...

Step 3: Post testing(2p)

- T collects the testing papers.

IV. Summary (1p)
- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done.

V. Homework

- Review Gr + Voc in Unit 9 – Unit 11.
- Review the Present simple tense, Sport Voc.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
……….

Unit 15 : COUNTRIES

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Talk about countries, nationality and language.
- Describe places, natural features.

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

- State dimensions.
II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1 - 4 Countries, Nationalities and Languages Voc to
talk about where people are from.

P. 154 - 6
Lesson 2 A 5 Writing a postcard about being on vacation. P. 156
Lesson 3 B 1 Comparing places using comparative and

superlative adjectives of one syllable.

P. 158
Lesson 4 B 2 - 5 Reading facts about famous places in the

world and practising comparatives.

P.159 - 61
Lesson 5 C 1 - 2 “Lots of …” as a quantifier with Geography

Voc to describe Vietnam.

P. 162 - 4
Lesson 6 C 3 Read a text about the world’s great rivers and

mountains to skim for details and get further
practice in comparatives and superlatives.

P. 165

Date of preparing: 06 / 4 / 10

UNIT 15 : COUNTRIES

Lesson 1:

A 1 – 4 P. 154 - 156

Period: 91

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice reading about countries,
nationalities, and languages vocabulary to talk about where people are from.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, pictures

C. Methods: Hangman, Rub out & Remember, Picture cue drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 09 / 4 / 10 Kha, N. Trang

6B 12 / 4 / 10 Huyền, H. Tùng

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Hang man: WORLD (5)

III. New lesson

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

-Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2

Practice

(20p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(5p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Translation
Situation
Examples
Examples

Rub out & Remember

Matching

- Ss match the EL words
with the meanings

Activity 1:

- T explains the situation
and

Set the sence:

Susan

Activity 2: Picture drill

a. Laura / Canada
b. Marie / France
c. John / USA
d. Yoko / Japan

e. Susan / Great Britain.
f. Bruce / Austrailia
Activity 3:

Noughts & Crosses

Ex:

Where is Lee from?
- She’s from Japan.
Activity 4:

Write it up A 2 / 155
- Ss work individually.

I. Vocabulary
world (n): thế giới

from (prep): đến
speak (v): nói

nationality (n): quốc tịch
language (n): ngơn ngữ

II. Listen and repeat

New words:

Canada (n): nước Canada

Great Britain (n): Vương Quốc Anh
Japan (n): Nhật Bản
China (n): Trung Quốc
Australia (n): Úc

Table A 3 / 155

III. Grammar
Ex: What is your name?
- My name is Susan.
Where are you from?
- I am from Canada.

Where + be + S + from?
S + be + from + name.

IV. Practice
Example exchange:

What is her name?
- Her name is Laura.

Where is she from?
- She is from Canada.

Lee Marie Laura

Bruce Susan Yoko

John You Minh

* Example:

“Minh is from Viet Nam. He speaks
Vietnamese.”

a. Yoko. b. Marie

IV. Summary (1p)

- Countries, Nationalities and Languages Voc to talk about where people are from.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practise saying the names of countries above again carefully and
fluently.

- Do the exercises A 1- 2 / 126 – 127 workbook.

- Do the exercise A4 / 156 – (Gap fill) writing about Susan and Bruce

Evaluation

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

……….
……….
Date of preparing: 10 / 4 / 10

UNIT 15 : COUNTRIES

Lesson 2 :

A 5 P. 156

Period: 92

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able topractice asking and answering about
country, nationality and language; writing a postcard about being on vacation.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Postcard, wordcues

C. Methods: Wordcues drill, Comprehension Qs, Board drill, Write it up
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 13 / 4 / 10 Mai, Tr. Tú

6B 13 / 4 / 10 Trịnh, Bách

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

Word cue drill

Hoa / Viet nam Jo / Australia
Tomiko / japan John / Britain
Li / China Susan / Canada
Example exchange: Where is Hoa from?

- She’s from Viet Nam.

What language does she speak?
 - She speaks Vietnamese.

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre
reading

(8p)

Step 2
While
reading

(20p)

Eleciting Voc

Situation
Translation
Examples
Real object
Explaination

Rub out & remember
Activity 1:

1. Set the scene:

- T. says: Who is this?
Nhan đang đi du lịch ở
nước Anh ……

I. Vocabulary
wet (adj): ẩm

interesting (adj): thú vị
tower (n): tháp

post card (n): bưu thiếp
a lot of = many / much

II. Practice A5 / 156
* Comprehension questions

1. Who is the post card from? (Nhan)
2. Where is the post card? (In London)
3. What is the weather like in London? (wet

and cool)

4. Is he traveling by train? (No, by bus)

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

-Step 3
Post
reading

(5p)

Ss look at the post card
and read

- T. hangs poster on the
board and runs through,
asks students to read the
post card and answers
the questions

- T. listens and checks
Activity 2: Matching

- Ask students work in
groups of 6 students
and put the word into 3
columns

Activity 3: Board drill

- After finish the chart

students use the grids as
cues

- Ss practice in pairs
Activity 4: Write it up

- Ask students to write a
postcard

- Ss work individually
- T. gives model

- Ask students to read
the postcard

- T. listens and corrects.

5. What is he going to do tomorrow? (visit
the Tower of London)

6. Who is the post card to? (Minh)
7. Where is Minh? (in Ha Noi)

* Answer key:

Country City Interesting places
Japan

Vietnam
The USA

China
Australia
France

Tokyo
Hue

New York
Beijing
Sydney
Paris

Mount Fujiama
The Citadel

The Statue of
Liberty

The GRaet wall
Bobdi Beach
The Effel Tower
* Example exchange

P1: Where are you from?

P2: I am from Japan. I am visiting Tokyo.
P1: What are you going to do tomorrow?
P2: I am going to visit Mount Fujiama.
* Suggestion Postcard from Vietnam

Dear Nhan,

I am on vacation in Hue. The weather is
cool and sunny.

I am traveling by bus and visiting a lot of
interesting places.

Tomorrow, I am going to visit the Citadel.
Love,

Minh

IV. Summary (1p)
- Reading and writing a postcard about being on vacation.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the postcard above again carefully and fluently.
- Finish the exercise writng above in the note book.

- Do the exercise A6 / 157 Ss’ book (Answer the Qs).

Evaluation

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

UNIT 15 : COUNTRIES

Lesson 3 :

B 1 P. 158

Period: 93

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the comparative and superlative
adjecyives of one syllable to compare places

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, posters

C. Methods: Completing, Matching, Wordcue drill, Lucky papers
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 15 / 4 / 10 P. Trang, Hai

6B 15 / 4 / 10 H. Tùng, V. Thương

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
1. Act: Matching

- T. hangs poster on the board and gives
instruction

- Ss to go to the board and match

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

Eleciting Voc
Picture

Translation
Reminding
Untonym
What & Where
Activity 1:
Listen and read

- Ss listen and read then
translate the phrases into
Vietnamese then find the
Gr with teacher’s help.

Ex:

big – bigger – the biggest

I. Vocabulary
building (n) toà nhà, cao ốc

people (n) con người
thin (a): gầy, mỏng
thick (a): dày

II. Grammar

Các dạng so sánh của tính từ ngắn
* So sánh hơn

small – smaller tall – taller
Short Adjective + er

* So sánh hơn nhất

small – the smallest
tall – the tallest

The + short Adjective + est

* Những tính từ kết thúc bằng 1 phụ
âm, trước nó là 1 nguyên âm, ta phải gấp
đôi phụ âm cuối rồi mới thêm est / er

* Note:

much / many – more – the most



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



160

-hot

wet

cold
big
Hue

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

(17p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Activity 2:

Complete the table

- Ss do this individually
then T calls some Ss to
come to the board and
complete.

Activity 3: Word cue drill

T. show the cues and runs
through and gives model
Example exchange:

P1: Ha Noi is wetter than

Can Tho.

P2: But Hue is the
wettest.

Activity 4: Lucky papers

- Ss work in 2 teams
- Listen to the Qs then
answer.

1. Phanxipang
2. Mekong

3. Hue 4. SaPa
5. HCM city

6. Ha Tinh

III. Practice

long longer the longest
big bigger the biggest

thin
thick
short
high
hot
wet

cold
old
* Cue:

1. Ha Noi Can Tho Hue - wet
2. Vinh - Ha Noi - HCM City - big
3. Ha Noi Uong Bi Sapa - cold
4. Ben Tre -Tra Vinh - Ha Tinh - hot
* Questions:

1. What is the tallest mountain in
Vienam?

2. What is the biggest river in VietNam?
3. What is the wettest City in Vietnam?
4. What is the coldest town in Vietnam?
5. What is the biggest City in Vietnam?
6. What is the hottest town in Vietnam?

IV. Summary (1p)

- Comparing places using comparative and superlative adjectives of one syllable

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practise the phrases in B1 / 158 again carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises B 1 – 2 / 129 work book.

B1: Điền từ vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành câu.
B2: Đặt câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân.

Ex: Is MeKong river longer than Red river?

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 13 / 4 / 10

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

Lesson 4 :

B 2 – 5 P. 159 - 161

Period: 94

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson student will be able to know more about famous places in
the world.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, Posters

C. Methods: Ordering, Guessing meaning, T / F statements, Chatting
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 16 / 4 / 10 Phi, N. Cường

6B 19 / 4 / 10 L. Linh, Lâm

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Chatting :

- T. asks students some questions

1. What is the biggest City in Vietnam? HCM City
2. What is the biggest City in Great Britain? London

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(8p)

Step 2
Practice

(20p)

Eleciting Voc
(translation)
(example)
(situation)

(translation)
(realia)

* Checking: Actions

Activity 1: Ordering

- T. gives instruction

Which is the biggest city in
the world?

Which is the smallest city in
the world?

- Ask students to put the
cities in the order biggest first
- T. runs through all the
questions

- Ask students to read the text
and answer the questions
Activity 2: Guess meaning:
- T. directs students to look at
the text and guess the

I. Vocabulary
high (adj): cao

long (adj): dài

thick (adj): dày
over (adv): qua
a million : 1 triệu
II. B2 - P159
* Key

1. Mexico City
2. Tokyo

3. London

4. Ho Chi Minh City
5. Ha Noi

* Comprehension questions
* Answer key:

1. No, it isn't.

2. Mexico City is the biggest city in
theworld.

3. Tokyo is bigger than London.

Meters: mét

a structure: 1 cơng trình kiến trúc
Kilometers: ki-lơ-mét

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

-Step 3

Further
Practice

(5p)

meaning of these words

- Ask students to read the text
and answer the questions.
Activity 3: T / F statements

- Ask students to say out
these statements are T/ F

* B4 - P162
Question

How long is the Great Wall?
high

thick
* Poster

1. Mexico City is the biggest City in
the world.

2. Sears Tower is taller than Petronas.
3. The Great Wall is over 9 meters
thick

* Key: 1T 2. F 3. T

IV. Summary (1p)

- Reading facts about famous places in the world and practising comparatives.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the texts above a gain carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises B3 / 129 workbook.

(Viết 5 câu văn để so sánh các kì quan trên thế giới dựa vàotừ gợi ý) 
Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 17 / 4 / 10

UNIT 15 : COUNTRIES

Lesson 5 :

C 1 – 2 P. 162 - 164

Period: 95

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use "lots of" as a quatofier with
Geography, vocabulary to describe Vietnam

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids :
C. Methods: 
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 20 / 4 / 10

6B 20 / 4 / 10

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
1. Act: Matching

- T. hangs poster on the board and gives
instruction

beautiful

</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

- Ask students to match the words in
column A with the suitable meaning in
column B

beaches
lakes

field
river
mountain
green

núi

cánh đồng
đẹp

sông
hồ
bãi biển

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
(situation)
(explanation)
(picture)
(translation)
(synonym)

* Checking: ROR

Activity 1: Presentation text
- T. models the text

- Ask: What are the natural
features?

"Lan tell us about" mountain,
river, lake, rain, forest

- T. asks some questions
About uses of "lots of"

A lot of = many / much
Lots of = many

Activity 2: Picture drill

- T. uses the pictures to
practice in pairs

- T. gives example
Activity 3:

Nought and Crosses

- T. divides the class into 2
groups

- Give instruction
Example exchange:

P1: Are there any forest in
Vietnam?

P2: Yes, there are a lot of
them.

- Let's play

- T. listens and checks

I. Vocabulary
a forest : rừng

a derest : sa mạc
rain (n) : mưa

great (adj) : tuyệt vời, to lớn
lots of = many = a lot of – nhiều

II. Text C1 - P162

* Model sentence

We have lots of mountains.
 rivers.
 forests.
 rain.

* Concept check:

- A lot of + uncountable noun
- Lots of + countable noun plural
III. C3 - P164

Example exchange:

P1: Does Vietnam have lots of
mountains?

P2: Yes, it does.

Mountains Interesting Lakes
Beaches Rivers Buildings

Trees Rain Ferests

IV. Summary (1p)

- “Lots of …” as a quantifier with Geography Voc to describe Vietnam.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text above a gain carefully and fluently.

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

-- Do the exercises A 1, 2 / 130 workbook.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 19 / 4 / 10

UNIT 15 : COUNTRIES

Lesson 6 :

C 3 P. 165

Period: 96

A. Objectives

- Students read the text about rivers in the world and great mountains to skim for
details and get further practive in using comparative and superative

- Practice reading and speaking skills.
- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Texbook, poster

C. Methods: What & Where, T / F statements, Lucky numbers
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 22 / 4 / 10

6B 22 / 4 / 10

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
RIVER, START, BEACH, TREE

METER, RAIN, HIGH, IN
GREAT, LONG

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)

Step 2
Practice

(15p)

Eleciting Voc
(situation)
(translation)
(example)
(transaltion)

* Checking: W&W
Activity 1:

T/ F statements

- T. hangs poster on the board
and runs through

- Give instruction: Ask
students to guess, which are

I. Vocabulary
I. Vocabulary

flow (v):
Tibet (n):
The sea (n):
North Africa (n):
II. Text C3 - P165
* T / F checking

1.There are 2 great rivers in VIetnam.
2. The Red river is longer than the

Mekong river.

3. The Red river and Mekong river

R I V E R S W C

M S T A R T S H

E L B E A C H I

T R E E I G I N

E I R O N E G A

R G L O T S H O

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

T/ F?

- T. collects students' ideas
- Ask students to read &
checks

Activity 2: Lucky numbers

* Comprehesion question
a - f P165

- T. runs through all the
questions and asks students to
read the text and answer the
questions in 3 minutes

- Let students to play a game

both start in China.

4. The logest river in the world is not
in Vietnam.

5. Phaxipang is the highest mountain
in the world.

* Key: 1T 2.F 3. F 4. T 5. F
* Answer the questions

- 1, 3, 6 , 10 lucky number

2-a Mekong river is the longest river
in Vietnam.

4-b Mekong river starts in Tibet.
5-c The nile river in the highest river
in the world.

7-d It flows to the Mediterranean Sea.
8-e Mount Everest is the highest
mountain in the world.

9-f. Phanxipang is the highest
mountain in Vietnam.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Read a text about the world’s great rivers and mountains to skim for details and get
further practice in comparatives and superlatives.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text above a gain carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercise C3 / 131 workbook. (Viết câu so sánh với than )
- Answer the Qs / 156 again in the note book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 20 / 4 / 10

CONSOLIDATION

Period: 97

A. Objectives

- Voc + Gr in Unit 9 – Unit 15 (Present simple tense, daily routine activities,
prepositions of place ….)

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Voc & Gr to do the exercises
given to improve their skills in doing exercises and improve Ss’ skills in
communicating.

- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Pictures, Poster, cards

C. Methods: Network, Transformation writing, Mutiple choice, Actions game
D. Contents

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

-I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)
Network:

Weather Sports and pastimes

III. New lesson

1. Pre task (8p)
- T reminds Ss of the Gr

I. Grammar
1. Present simple tense

- To talk about everyday actions,
routines.

- To describe school timetables.
2. Present progressive tense
Ex: He is playing soccer

3. Cách hỏi đáp về phương tiện đi lại.
How do you go to school / travel to
work ?

- I go to school by walk.
- I travel to work by car.
2. While task (20p)

- Ss do the exercises individually.

* Multiple choice: Choose the best one to complete the sentences.

1. Is the garden beautiful?

a. Yes, it isn’t. b. Yes, it is. c. No, it is.
2. ……….there a lake in your garden?

a. Is b. Do c. Have

3. It is very ……..in the country.

a. full b. quiet c. noisy

4. Does Ba live in town? – No. He ………

a. live in the country. b. lives in the country c. lives at home
5.What are …………..? – They are houses.

a. that b. this c. those

6. What …………do you get up?

a. time b. o’clock c. for

7. Does he …………to the park ? – Yes, he goes to the park on foot.

a. travels b. ride c. walk

8. There is a house ………….the park.

a. in front b. next c. opposite

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

a. to the right of b. to the left c. on

10. There is a movie theater …………..the factory and the restaurant.

a. in b. between c. on

11. …………..does your mother do ?

a. How b. Which c. What

12. …………brothers does she have?

a. How many b. Which c. What

13. Miss Nga ………….her breakfast in the factory.

a. plays b. has c. have

14. My father is a teacher. He ………in a prymary school.

a. lives b. plays c. works

15. They play soccer in a ………near their house.

a. stadium b. hospital c. restaurant

16. ……….Nga play volleyball?

a. Do b. Does c. Is

17. …………do you go to school?

a. What b. Where c. How

18. ………..Nam’s school big?

a. Is b. are c. am

19. What ………they do?

a. does b. are c. do

20. ……….are telephones.

a. These b. That c. This

* Gap – Fill: Complete the passage using “is / am / are”

2. I …….Lan. I ……… a student. My sister …… a student too. My father and
mother …………..teachers. They ……… forty. They …….. very happy.

* Transformation writing: Write the sentences using the words given.
Name / Hoa. I / get up / six o’clock. I / go to school / six thirty.

3. Post task (5p)

- T hepls Ss to correct the exercises above.

IV. Summary

- Voc + Gr in Unit 5 – Unit 7 (Present simple tense, daily routine activities,
prepositions of place ….)

V. Homework (5p)

- Review Voc and Gr in Unit 1 – Unit 7 to prepare for “the first semester test”
- Do the exercises in these Units again.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

-Date of preparing: 20 / 4 / 10

THE SECOND SEMESTER TEST

Period: 98

A. Objectives

- Mainly in Modal verbs with “if”, “Could” with “wish”, Direct and reported speech,
adverb clauses of results, prepositions of time …

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr and Voc they’ve learnt to do
the exercises given.

- Improve listening, reading, writing skills.
B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, pens…

C. Methods: Gap fill, multiple choice, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A, B

II. Revision / Warmer

- T checks Ss’ preparations

III. New lesson
Step 1: Pre testing (1p)

- T gives to Ss the testing papers.

- Ss check the exercises then ask the T if necessary.

Step 2: While testing (40p)

T monitors class. Ss do the exercises individually.

The contents of the test

- Chờ đề kiểm tra của Phòng GD & ĐT Hải Hà

Step 3: Post testing (2p)
- T collects the testing papers.

IV. Summary

- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done

V. Homework (2p)
- Review the Gr & Voc in Unit 1 – Unit 7.

- Do the exercises in the tét above again.

Evaluation

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

CHỮA BÀI KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ II

Period: 99

A. Objectives

- Mainly in Modal verbs with “if”, “Could” with “wish”, Direct and reported speech,
adverb clauses of results, prepositions of time …

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the Gr and Voc they’ve learnt to do
the exercises given.

- Improve listening, reading, writing skills.
B. Teaching aids: Testing papers, pens…

C. Methods: Gap fill, multiple choice, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Absent students Ss for revision
6A

II. Revision / Warmer

- T checks Ss’ preparations

III. New lesson
Step 1: Pre task (10p)

- T gives comments about how well Ss’ve done.
- Gv nêu một số Hs đã làm tốt bài kiểm tra.
6A:

6B:

- Gv rút kinh nghiệm một số Hs chưa chú ý ôn tập tốt, kết quả kém.
6A:

6B:

Step 2: While task (40p)

- Gv đưa ra một số lỗi Hs mắc nhiều:

- Gv y/c Hs lên bảng làm lại các bài tập.
- Gv HD Hs chữa bài theo đáp án

Step 3: Post task (5p)

- Hs tự đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra của mình dựa trên biểu điểm đã cho.

IV. Summary

- T gives the comments about how hard Ss’ve done.

- Hs tự đưa ra một số rút kinh nghiệm cho bản thân để học tốt hơn.

V. Homework (5p)
- Review the Gr & Voc in Unit 9 – Unit 15.

- Do the exercises in Unit 9 - 15 – work book again.

Evaluation

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

-……….
……….
……….

Unit 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

I. Objectives

Helping Ss to:

- Identify quantities of food.

- Talk about environmental issues.
- Talk about occupations.

II. Teaching aids

CD player, cards, posters, wordcues, pictures, real objects
III. Procedure

Lesson 1 A 1, 3 Countable and uncountable quantifiers: a lot, a
little, a few to talk about Food.

P. 166 - 7
Lesson 2 A 2 Read a text about Faring and getting further

practice in a lot, a little, a few.

P. 166 - 7
Lesson 3 B 4 - 5 Reading a text about the Environment to

understand ideas in terms of cause and effect:
“Why …? – Because ….”

P. 168
Lesson 4 B 1 Reading a text about pollution for Voc to

understand the details.

P.169 - 70
Lesson 5 B 2 Should and Shouldn’t for giving advices about

protecting the Environment.

P. 170 - 1
Lesson 6 B 4 - 5 Further practice in Should and Shouldn’t for

giving advices about the Environment.

P. 171 - 2
Lesson 7 Grammar

Practice

Further practice in Simple present, Present
progressive, Comparatives and Superlatives,
Quantifiers and Countability, Countries,
Natural features, Environment Voc.

P. 174 - 5

Date of preparing: 23 / 4 / 10

UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 1:

A 1, 3 P. 166 - 167

Period: 100

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice speaking fluently the countable
and uncountable quanlitifiers: a lot, a little, a few " to talk about food

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, Pictures

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 27 / 4 / 10 Hiếu, Hà

6B 26 / 4 / 10 Khoẻ, N.Tùng

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Network: Nouns about food and drink

Countable nouns Uncountable nouns
- Ss work in groups of 4

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(10p)

Step 2
While task

(17p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Picture

- Rub out & Remember
Activity 1:

T introduces the structure.
- Ss find the form

T. explains.

Activity 2: Matching

-T. presses the tape.

-Ss listen and write the
letter of the picture.

-T. gives Feedback.

Activity 3:

I. Vocabulary

A few : 1 vài, vài (dùng với N đếm đc)

A little: 1 ít, 1 chút (dùng với N không
đếm đc)

II. Grammar
Hỏi đáp về lượng, số lượng
How much + Unct N + is there ?
There is …

How many + plural N + are there ?
There are …

- a little: 1 ít dùng với DT o đếm đc.
- a few: 1 ít (vài) dùng với DT đếm đc.
- lots of: nhiều dùng với DT đếm đc.

III. Practice
1. Listen and match

* Listen and write the letter of the
picture under the right heading. A 3 /
P. 167.

Tapescript :

1. There are lots of potatoes.
2. There are some tomatoes.
3. There are a few onions.
4. There are a lot of vegetables.
5. There is a little rice.

6. There are some flowers.

Answer key :

1.d 2.f 3.b 4.a 5.c
6.e

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

-Step 3
Post task

(8p)

Picture cues drill

T – Ss, Ss – Ss

Open pairs – Closed pairs

Activity 4: Chain game.
- Ss work in groups of 3
then T ask for feed back.

2. Speak
* A 1 / P.166.

A : How much rice is there ?

B : There’s (some / a lot of / lots of ) a
little rice.

A : How many eggs are there ?

B : There are (some / a lot of / lots of )

a few eggs.

What’s for dinner ?

S1 : There’s a little rice.

S2 : There’s a little rice and some
tomatoes.

S3 : There’s a little rice, some tomatoes
and a few eggs.

S4 : …

IV. Summary (1p)

- Countable and uncountable quantifiers: a lot, a little, a few to talk about Food.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practise the dialoguge above a gain carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises A 1 / 132 – work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 24 / 4 / 10

UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 6 :

A 2 P. 116 - 117

Period: 101

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read a text about Faring and getting
further practice in a lot, a little, a few.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Poster, Picture

C. Methods: Open prediction, Comprehension Qs, Board drill
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 27 / 4 / 10

6B 27 / 4 / 10

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

100g rice A dozen eggs 2 potatoes
½ kg onions 4 kg vegetables A glass of milk

1kg fruits 5 tomatoes 2 flowers

Ex: How many flowers arte there? – There are 2 flowers

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(10p)

Step 2
While task

(15p)

Step 3
Post task

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Examples
Picture
Picture
Explaination
Actions
Situation
Actions
Translation
- Net work

Activity 1: Open prediction
- Ss guess the information
then fill in the table.

- Ss read the text and check
their predictions

Activity 2: Comprehension 
Qs

Ss read the text and answer
the questions.

T. gives Feedback.
T. presses the tape.

Ss listen with book-open.
Ss read the text individually.
Activity 3: Grid

I. Vocabulary
animal (n) : con vật
buffalo (n) : con trâu

cow (n) : con bò cái.
(to) work : làm việc

(to) plow : cày
(to) pull a cart : kéo xe bò

(to) grow : trồng, mọc

(to) produce : sản xuất
II. Read A 2 / 166
1. Complete the table

Mr Hai has Mr Hai produces

1. 4. 1. 4.

2. 5. 2. 5.

3. 6. 3. 6.

The keys:

Mr Hai has a cat, two dogs, a cow….
Mr Hai produces vegetables, rice, …

* Answer the Qs

1.What do Mr. Hai have ?

2. What is there near his house ?

a. He produces a lot of rice.
b. Yes, he does.

c. He produces a little fruit.

d. They produce a little milk.
e. They produce a lot of eggs.
- Ss complete the table below then use the information to answer the Qs.

Mr. Hai produces / has / grow A lot Some A few A little

Paddy fields  

Rice

Vegetable 

Fruits trees 

Fruits 

Animals 

Buffalo 

</div>
(175)<div class='page_container' data-page=175>

-Cows 

Milk 

Chickens 

Eggs 

IV. Summary (1p)

- Read a text about Faring and getting further practice in a lot, a little, a few.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text above a gain carefully and fluently then answer the
Qs / 167 (a - e) again.

- Do the exercises A1 / 132 work book.

Ex: a. a lot of tomatoes b. a little water
Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 26 / 4 / 10

UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 3 :

A 4 – 5 P. 168

Period: 102

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to read a text about the
disadvantages of overpopulation to understand main ideas and details in terms of
cause and effect “why” “because”.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : Poster, pictures

C. Methods: Matching, Ordering, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision
6A 29 / 4 / 10

6B 29 / 4 / 10

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
Matching: Ss work in groups of 5 - 6

1. The population a. rừng

</div>
(176)<div class='page_container' data-page=176>

8. Animals h. thế giới

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(10p)

Step 2
While task

(17p)

Step 3
Post task

(8p

Eleciting Voc
Real life
Mime
Situation
Situation
Explaination
Translation
Situation

Rub out & Remember
Activity 1: Ordering

T. gives an example.

-T. introduces the structure.
-T. sets the scene.

Activity 2:

- Ss guess the order.

Ss read the text and check
their order.

Activity 3:

Comprehension Qs.

SS read the text and answer
the questions.

-T. asks – SS answer orally.
-T. gives Feedback.

-T. presses the tape.

-SS listen with book-open.

In groups, SS retell the text in
their own words.

I. Vocabulary
land (n): đất

(to) cut down (trees, the forest ) : đốn,
hạ cây

burn (v): đốt cháy
destroy (v): phá huỷ

plants (n) : cây cối ( thuộc loại nhỏ)
to be in danger: trong tình trạng nguy
hiểm

II. Read

Ex : Farmers are burning the forests.
The present progressive tense :

S + am / is / are + V.ing -(ñang)

* Is the population of the world
growing ? What happen ?

a.produce b.Trees cut down
c.more food d.The forest burn
e.The population grows

f.New fields make

g. Animals and plants in danger.

*A 4 / P.168. (Ss check their orders.)

Answer keys : a, c, b, d, f, a, g

A 5 / P.168. Answer keys :

a. Because there are more people.
b. Because they need more fields.
c. Because we are destroying plants
and animals.

IV. Summary (1p)

- Reading a text about the Environment to understand ideas in terms of cause and
effect: “Why …? – Because ….”

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text above a gain carefully and fluently.
-Do Exercise A 3 / P. 133.

-Prepare Unit 16 – B1-2 / P. 169-170.

(Environment, Ocean, air, trash, pollute, waste, power, coal, oil, gas)
Evaluation

……….
……….

</div>
(177)<div class='page_container' data-page=177>

-……….
Date of preparing: 01 / 5 / 10

UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 4 :

B 1 P. 169 - 170

Period: 103

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use negative imperative and read a text
about “pollution” for vocabulary and to understand main ideas and details.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : The pictures in the textbook, cards, posters

C. Methods: Slap the board, Open prediction, Comprehension Qs, Matching
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 4 / 5 / 10

6B 4 / 5 / 10

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)
- Slap the board

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(10p)

Step 2
While task

(17p)

Eleciting Voc
Explanation
Explanation
Real life
Real life
Situation
Explanation
explaination
Situation
Reminding
Translation

Activity 1: What & Where

I. Vocabulary

Enviroment (n) : môi trường
Ocean = Sea (n) : đại dương, biển
air (n) : khơng khí
trash (n) : rác rưởi.
(to) pollute : làm ô nhiễm
(to) waste : phí phạm, lãng phí
power (n): sức mạnh, năng lượng
coal (n) : than đá, củi
oil (n) : dầu, nhiên liệu

gas (n): hơi, khí đốt
II. Read

1. Grammar

Ex : Don’t throw trash on the street.

Negative Imperative :

phá
hủy

Dân
số
rừng

</div>
(178)<div class='page_container' data-page=178>

Step 3
Post task

(8p

Activity 2:

T. gives an example.

-T. introduces the structure.
-T. sets the scene.

-Pre questions.

- Ss read the text then correct
their predictions

Activity 3:

Comprehension Questions.

Ss read the text and answer
the questions.

-T. asks – Ss answer orally.
-T. gives Feedback.

-T. presses the tape.

-SS listen with book-open.
Activity 4: Matching

Ss work in groups of 3 - 4

-Ss read the text individually.

Don’t + V

* Hôm nay chúng ta cùng tìm hiểu về
sự ơ nhiễm mơi trường, vậy đâu là
nguyên nhân ta xẽ cùng xem.

2. B1 / P.169

What are we destroying ?

1. (forests)

2. (wild animals)
3. (plants)

What are we wasting ?

1. (water)

2. (power : coal, oil, gas )
What are we polluting ?

1. (The air)
2. (The land)
3. (The rivers )
4. (The Oceans)

B1 / P. 169-170. Wild gases ( =
motorbike and factory fumes ; ≠
natural gas for power ).

Answer keys :

a. Because we are destroying the
forests.

b. Burning too much coal, oil, gas is
polluting the air.

c. It comes from man (people).

Producing too much trash is polluting
the land, the rivers and the Oceans.

B2 / P.170

Answer key

a.c b.f c.a d.h e.e f.b
g.g h.d

IV. Summary (1p)

- Reading a text about pollution for Voc to understand the details.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practise the dialoguge above a gain carefully and fluently.
- Do the exercises

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing: 02 / 5 / 10

</div>
(179)<div class='page_container' data-page=179>

-UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 5 :

B 2 P. 170 - 171

Period: 104

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to use “should and shouldn’t” for
giving advice about protecting the environment.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : pictures from the textbook, posters, cassette recorder.

C. Methods: 
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

6A 5 / 5 / 10

6B 6 / 5 / 10

II. Revision / Warmer (7p)

- Hangman.

Topic : Đây là thứ chúng ta phải đối mặt hàng ngày
- - - = trash (5 letters)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Presentation

(10p)
Step 2
Practice

(15p)
Step 3
Further
Practice

(8p)

Eleciting Voc
Explaination
Translation
Mime

Rub out & remember
Activity 1:

- T explains the new structure
- Ss find the form

Activity 2:

Picture drill & Wordcue drill.
T. runs through vocabulary.

T. models the first two cues.
Ss repeat chorally , then
individually.

SS practice in pairs.
Pairwork.

Open pairs.

I. Vocabulary
a trash can = a waste basket
leave : rời, bỏ

put : đặt, để
II. B4 / P.171

Ex : We shouldn’t leave our trash.
We should put trash cans in a bag.
S + should + V(inf) + O :

Should : nên

Shouldn’t : không nên
III. B5 / P.172
Example exchange:

S1 : We shouldn’t waste paper.
S2 : That’s right, We should save it.
S1 : We shouldn’t damage trees.
S2 : That’s right, we should grow

them.

Water- waste/
save

Trees-damage/grow

Power-waste/save

Forests-cut
down/grow

</div>
(180)<div class='page_container' data-page=180>

Bottles-Closed pairs burn/collect throw/collect
Trash-leave/put

it in the trash
can

Flowers-pick/leave

IV. Summary (1p)

- Should and Shouldn’t for giving advices about protecting the Environment.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, practise the dialoguge above a gain carefully and fluently.

- Do the exercises

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….
Date of preparing:

UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 6 :

B 4 – 5 P. 171 - 172

Period: 104

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to read the text about recycling in
Vietnam.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, poster

C. Methods: Open predictions, What & Where, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

Class Date of teaching Ss for revision

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)

Hangman.

Topic : Đây là 1 hoạt động cần thiết trong vấn đề tiết kiệm nguyên vật liệu
- - - = recycle (7 letters)

III. New lesson

Step 1
Pre task

(10p)
Step 2
While task

(17p)

Eleciting Voc
Translation
Picture
Explaination
Explaination
Presenting the text
Activity 1:

I. Vocabulary

scrap metal (n) : sắt thép, phế thải
pig (n) : con lợn
feed : cho ăn, chăn
use : sử dụng, dùng

* Hôm nay các em sẽ cùng đọc 1 bài
viết về vấn đề tái chế ở Việt Nam

</div>
(181)<div class='page_container' data-page=181>

-Step 3
Post task

(8p

Open prediction

Activity 2:

SS read the text and answer
the questions.

-T. asks – SS answer orally.
-T. gives Feedback.

-T. presses the tape.

-SS listen with book-open.
-SS read the passage
individually.

B6 / P.172 /-Pre questions.
1. What do you do with waste

paper ?

Do you throw old plastic away ?
II. B6 / P.172-173
-Comprehension Questions.

Answer key :

a) In VietNam, we collect and
recycle many things.

b) We collect waste food and feed
it to pigs.

c) Factories recycle them.
d) Yes, I do.

I collect waste paper, cans , …

IV. Summary (1p)

- Further practice in Should and Shouldn’t for giving advices about the Environment.

V. Homework (4p)

- Review Voc & Gr, read the text above a gain carefully and fluently.

- Do the exercises B3, 4, B6/ 172 – 173 work book.

Evaluation

……….
……….
……….

Date of preparing:

UNIT 16 : MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Lesson 6 :

B 4 – 5 P. 171 - 172

Period: 105

A. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to use present simple and
progressive, comparatives and superlatives, quantifiers and countability : countries,
Natural Features, Farming and Environment vocabulary.

- Improve Ss’ skills in communicating.
- Interest Ss in learning English.

B. Teaching aids : CD players, poster

C. Methods: Open predictions, What & Where, Comprehension Qs
D. Contents

I. Organization

</div>
(182)<div class='page_container' data-page=182>

II. Revision / Warmer (5p)

Hangman.

Topic : Đây là 1 hoạt động cần thiết trong vấn đề tiết kiệm nguyên vật liệu
- - - = recycle (7 letters)

III. New lesson
Teacher’s and

Students’activities

Contents

T. divides the class into two
groups.

-T. gives the topic.

-SS go to the board to write
(one student-one word).

-T. comments.

I ) Warmer :

-Networks.

.Groupwork.

-T. gives “Situation” (Dialogue )
-T. gets SS to present the Target
item.

-SS fill in the gaps.
-T. corrects.

-Feedback.

II ) Present simple :

Nam : Where are you from ?
Tom : I am from canada.

Nam : Do you speak Vietnamese ?
Tom : No, I don’t.

I speak English and French.

* Present simple :

“to be” :

.Aff. : he / she / it / singular N + is
I + am
We / you /they /plural N + are
.Neg.: Thêm “not” sau “am/ is / are”

.Inter. : Đảo “am / is /are” ra trước S, cuối câu
chấm hỏi.

-Động từ thường

Aff. : he /she / it /singular N + V-s/es
I / we / you / they /plural N + V(inf.)
Neg.: he /she / it /singular N + doesn’t + V
I / we / you / they / plural N + don’t + V
Inter. : Do / Does + S + V ?

1 / P.174.Answer keys :

a) Do … speak … ? / … don’t / speak
b) Speaks.

c) Speaks chinese.
d) Speak Japanese.
e) Speaks Vietnamese.
f) Speaks English.
-T. gives an exchange.

-T. reviews the grammatical
points..

III ) Present simple and present progressive :

A : What are you doing ?
B : I am watching TV.



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



182

</div>
(183)<div class='page_container' data-page=183>

-SS fill in the gaps.
-Feedback.

* Present progressive :

-Aff. : S + am/ is/ are + V.ing.

now, at the present (time/ moment )

2 / P.174. Answer keys :

a. is b.lives c.is / is staying.
d.is e.does / teaches

f.Does / teach /doesn’t /teaches
-T. gives an exchange.

-T. presents the structure.

-SS do the exercise in groups.
-SS go to the board to write.
-T. gives Feedback.

IV)Adjectives:Comparatives and superlatives :

A : HaNoi is bigger than Long Xuyen.
B : But HCMc is the biggest.

* Comparative : (short Adj)

 S + V + Adj / Adv + ER + than + … : hơn

* Superlative :

 S + V + Adj / Adv + EST : nhất

3 / P.175. Answer keys :

Long Longer The longest
Short Shorter The shortest

Tall taller The tallest

Small smaller The

smallest

Big bigger The biggest

High higher The highest
thick Thicker The thickest
a.longer / the longest b.the longest
c.the tallest / taller / the tallest.

d.biggest / bigger / the biggest / the biggest
-T. gives Target item.

-SS do the exercise individually.

-T. gives Feedback.

V ) A few, a little, a lot/lots of :

 A few + plural N : 1 ít

 A little + uncountable N : 1 ít

 A lot / lots of + plural N / uncontable N :
Answer keys :

A lot ; a little ; a few; a lot ; lots , a lot
-SS each make two sentences,

using Comparative / Superlative.
-SS go to the board to write.
-T. corrects.

VI) Production :

-Sentence Race.
Comparative / Superlative.
-T. says and writes“Homework”

on the board.
-SS copy.

VII ) Homework :

-Learn Unit 1-16.

</div>
(184)<div class='page_container' data-page=184></div>


<a href=' />

E6ca nam ngan gon

<b>REVISION</b>

<b>UNIT 1: </b>

<i><b>GREETINGS</b></i>

<b>UNIT 1: GREETINGS</b>

<b>Lesson 1:</b>

A1 – A4

P.10 - 11



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 1: GREETINGS</b>

<b>Lesson 2:</b>

<i>A 5 - 8</i>

<b>UNIT 1: GREETINGS</b>

<b>Lesson 3:</b>

<i>B 1 – 6 P.14-16</i>

<b>UNIT 1: GREETINGS</b>

<b>Lesson 4:</b>

<i>C 1 – 4 P. 17 - 19</i>



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 1: GREETINGS</b>

<b>Lesson 5:</b>

<i>C5 – C6 P. 19</i>

<b>UNIT 2: </b>

<i><b>AT SCHOOL</b></i>

<b>UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>

<b>Lesson 1:</b>

A1 – 4 P. 20 - 22

<b>UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>

<b>Lesson 2:</b>

<i>B 1 – 2 P. 23 - 24</i>

<b>UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>

<b>Lesson 3:</b>

<i>B 3 – 4 P. 24 - 25</i>



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>

<b>Lesson 4:</b>

<i>B 5 – 6 P.25</i>

<b>UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>

<b>Lesson 5:</b>

<i>C1 P. 26</i>

<b>UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>

<b>Lesson 6:</b>

<i>C 1 – 4 P. 28-29</i>



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 3: </b>

<i><b>AT HOME</b></i>

<b>Lesson 1:</b>

<i>A 1 – 2 P. 30 - 31</i>







Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>

<b>Lesson 2:</b>

<i>A 3 – 4 P. 32 - 34</i>

<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>

<b>Lesson 3:</b>

<i>B 1 -2 P. 35 - 36</i>



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>

<b>Lesson 4:</b>

<i>B3 – 5 P.37</i>

<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>

<b>Lesson 5:</b>

<i>C1 – 2 P. 38 - 39</i>



Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 6



<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>